Line Thermal/Dot Printer
STAR Line Mode
Command Specifications
Rev. 0.00
Star Micronics Co., Ltd.
Special Products Operating Division
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This specifications document describes the command specifications for the STAR MODE on hybrid printers.
Information contained herein applies to models with the following conditions.
• Hybrid printers
• Interfaces:
- Parallel
• RS-232C
• USB
- Ethernet
< Applicable Models:>
• HSP7000
1-1
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
2. COMMAND FUNCTION LIST
• Standard Commands
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
Slip, Validation
Font style
ESC RS F
Select font
-
and character
ESC GS t
Select code page
←
set
ESC GS =
ESC R
ESC /
ESC SP
ESC M
ESC P
ESC :
ESC g
ESC 6
ESC 7
ESC i
Write blank code page data
Specify international character set
Specify/cancel slash zero
Set ANK right space
Specify 12 dot pitch
Specify 15 dot pitch
Specify 16 dot pitch
Specify 14 dot pitch
-
←
←
←
←
Specify 7 x 9 font (half dots)
Specify 5 x 9 font (2P-1)
Specify 5 x 9 font (3P-1)
-
-
-
-
-
Character
expansion
settings
Set/cancel the double wide/high
ESC W
ESC h
SO
Specify/cancel expanded wide
Specify/cancel expanded high
Set double wide printing
Cancel expanded wide
Set double high
Cancel expanded high
Select emphasized printing
Cancel emphasized printing
Select/cancel underline mode
Select/cancel upperline mode
Selects white/black inversion
←
←
←
←
-
DC4
ESC SO
ESC DC4
ESC E
ESC F
ESC -
ESC _
ESC 4
-
Print modes
←
←
←
←
Select white/black inversion red/
black colors (substitute function)
ESC 5
Cancel white/black inversion
-
Cancel white/black inversion red/
black colors (substitute function)
Select red/black substitute function
ESC GS 4
[ESC 4/5 setting]
SI
Select upside-down printing
←
DC2
ESC RS i
Cancel upside-down printing
-
←
Specify/cancel character rotated
mode
Line spacing
LF
Line feed
←
CR
Line feed
←
ESC a
ESC z
ESC 0
Feed paper n lines
Select line feed amount
Specify line feed to 3 mm
←
←
Specify line feed amount of 1/8
inch
ESC 1
Specify line feed to 3 mm
Specify line feed amount of 7/72
inch
ESC J
ESC j
ESC I
ESC A
n/4 mm line feed
-
n/8mm line feed
Specify line feed amount of 3
n/72 inch paper feed
Reverse paper feed
n/144 inch paper feed
Define n/72 inch pitch line feed
mm/4mm
ESC 2
Specify line feed amount (Defined
←
by ESC A n)
ESC 3
ESC y
-
-
Specify n/216 inch paper feed
Specify n/144 inch paper feed
2-1
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
Slip, Validation
Page control
FF
Form feed
-
ESC C
ESC C 0
VT
ESC B
ESC I
Set page length to n lines
Set page length in n x 24 mm units
Feed paper to vertical tab position
Set vertical tab position
-
-
-
-
Horizontal
direction position
Set left margin
←
ESC Q
HT
ESC D
ESC GS A
ESC GS R
ESC GS a
ESC &
Set right margin
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
Move horizontal tab
Set/cancel horizontal tab
Move absolute position
Move relative position
Specify position alignment
Register/delete download
characters
Download
ESC %
ESC K
ESC L
Set/cancel download characters
Standard density bit image
High density bit image
Fine bit image
←
←
←
-
Bit image
Graphics
ESC k
ESC X
Fine bit image
-
ESC ^
-
9 Dot bit image
Logos
ESC FS q
ESC FS p
ESC RS L
ESC b
ESC d
ESC BEL
Register logo
Print logo
Logo batch control
Print bar code
Auto-cutter
Set external drive device 1 pulse
width
←
←
←
Bar Codes
Cutter control
External device
drive
-
←
BEL
FS
SUB
EM
ESC GS BEL
ESC GS EM DC1
External device 1 drive instruction
External device 1 drive instruction
External device 2 drive instruction
External device 2 drive instruction
Ring buzzer
←
←
←
←
-
Set external buzzer drive pulse
←
condition
ESC GS EM DC2
ESC RS d
ESC RS r
ESC RS a
ESC ACK SOH
Execute external buzzer drive
Set print density
Set printing speed
Set status transmission conditions
Real-time printer status
(ASB Status)
←
-
-
←
←
Print Setting
Status
ENQ
EOT
ETB
ESC RS E
Real-time printer status (1)
Real-time printer status (2)
Update of ETB status
Clear ETB counter, initialize ETB
status
←
←
←
←
2-2
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Class
Commands
ESC p
ESC q
ESC $
Name
Thermal
Slip, Validation
Kanji Character
Set JIS Kanji Character mode
Cancel JIS Kanji Character mode
Set/cancel JIS Kanji Character
←
←
←
mode
ESC s
ESC t
ESC r
ESC u
Set two-byte Kanji characters left/
←
←
←
right spaces
Set single-byte Kanji characters
left/right spaces
Register Chinese download
characters
-
Specify two-byte 16 x 16 dot Kanji
Character (Single density/double
density)
ESC x
ESC w
-
-
Specify expanded Kanji characters
(Double tall/double high & wide)
Specify expanded Kanji characters
(batch double tall/double high &
wide)
Others
RS
CAN
-
Ring buzzer
←
Cancel print data and initialize
commands
ESC @
ESC U
Initialize commands
-
←
Select printing direction
ESC GS #
ESC # @
ESC # N ?
Set memory switch
Initialize all memory switches
Inquire memory switch setting
contents
←
←
←
ESC # *
ESC ?
DC3
Inquire printer version
Reset printer
Printer deselect
Select printer
←
←
←
←
DC1
(*) Kanji character commands
• Kanji character control commands are ignored on printers not installed with Kanji character fonts (those in-
tended for overseas).
• All Kanji control commands are ignored if the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single
byte countries) by the memory switch.
2-3
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
• Raster Related Commands
Class Commands
Name
Thermal
Slip, Validation
Raster
commands
ESC * r R
Initialize raster mode
-
ESC * r A
ESC * r B
ESC * r C
ESC * r D
ESC * r E
ESC * r F
ESC * r P
ESC * r Q
ESC * r m l
ESC * r m r
ESC * r T
Enter raster mode
Quit raster mode
Clear raster data
Drawer drive
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Set raster EOT mode
Set raster FF mode
Set raster page length
Set raster print quality
Set raster left margin
Set raster right margin
Set raster top margin
Set raster print color
Transfer raster data (auto line
feed)
ESC * r K
b n1 n2 d1 … dk
k n1 n2 d1 … dk
ESC * r Y
Transfer raster data
Move vertical direction position
(Line feed for specified dots)
Execute form feed mode
Execute EOT mode
Discard specified byte count of
data
-
-
ESC FF NUL
ESC FF EOT
ESC * r N
-
-
-
ESC * r V
Execute external buzzer drive
-
• Black Mark Related Commands
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
Auto-cutter:
Execute top of form
Slip, Validation
Black mark
Related
ESC d
FF
-
-
commands
ESC C
ESC C 0
VT
Set page length to n lines
-
-
-
-
Set page length in n x 24 mm units
Feed paper to vertical tab position
Set vertical tab position
ESC B
• 2-Color Printing Related Commands
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
Specify printing color in 2 color
printing mode
Select/cancel 2-color printing
mode
Specify white/black inversion or
printing color red
Slip, Validation
2-Color Printing
ESC RS c
-
-
Related
commands
ESC RS C
ESC 4
Select white/black inversion red/
black colors (substitute function)
ESC 5
Cancel white/black inversion or
specify printing color black
Set print density
Set printing speed
Register logo
Cancel white/black inversion red/
black colors (substitute function)
-
-
←
←
ESC RS d
ESC RS r
ESC FS q
ESC FS p
Print logo
2-4
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
• Mark Commands
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
Slip, Validation
Mark Commands ESC GS * 0
ESC GS * 1
Print mark
-
-
-
Specify mark height and line feed
At each mark number
Specify mark color, mark horizontal
width
ESC GS * 2
ESC GS * W
ESC GS * C
Register mark format to non-
volatile memory
Initialize mark format from non-
volatile memory
-
-
• Auto Logo Commands
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
Register Auto Logo setting to non-
volatile memory
Slip, Validation
Auto Logo
Commands
ESC GS / W
ESC GS / C
-
-
Initialize Auto Logo setting from
non-volatile memory
ESC GS / 1
ESC GS / 2
ESC GS / 3
ESC GS / 4
ESC GS / 5
Set ON/OFF for Auto Logo function
Set command characters
Set user macro 1
Set user macro 2
Set command character switching
-
-
-
-
-
method
ESC GS / 6
Set partial cut just prior to Auto
Logo printing
-
• PDF417 Commands
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
Slip, Validation
PDF417
Commands
ESC GS x S 0
Set PDF417 bar code size
-
ESC GS x S 1
ESC GS x S 2
Set PDF417 ECC (security level)
Set PDF417 module x direction
size
-
-
ESC GS x S 3
ESC GS x D
ESC GS x P
ESC GS x I
Set PDF417 module aspect ratio
Set PDF417 bar code data
Print PDF417 bar code
Get PDF417 bar code expansion
information
-
-
-
←
• Print Start Trigger Control Commands
Class
Commands
ESC GS g 0
ESC GS g 1
Name
Thermal
Slip, Validation
Slip, Validation
Print starting
trigger
Print starting trigger
Set print start timer
-
-
• QR Code Commands
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
Set QR code model
QR Code
ESC GS y S 0
ESC GS y S 1
ESC GS y S 2
ESC GS y D 1
ESC GS y D 2
ESC GS y P
-
-
-
-
-
-
Set QR code mistake correction level
Set QR code cell size
Set QR code data (auto setting)
Set QR code data (manual setting)
Print QR code
ESC GS y I
Get QR code expansion
information
←
2-5
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
• Page Function Commands
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
180˚ inversion function
Water mark function
Slip, Validation
Slip, Validation
Page Function
ESC GS h 0
ESC GS h 1
-
-
• Slip/Validation Function Commands
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
Slip Function
ESC SI
-
-
-
-
-
ESC FF
ESC VT
ESC EM
ESC US
Slip/Validation Function
-
Set slip/validation automatic clamp
• Page Mode Commands
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
Slip, Validation
Batch print page data
Select page mode
Page mode
FF
-
-
-
-
-
ESC n
ESC !
ESC *
ESC T
Select line mode
Set page mode print region
Sets page mode print direction
• Station Selection Command
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
Slip, Validation
Station Selection ESC + A
Station Selection
←
• Presenter Related Commands
Class
Commands
Name
Thermal
Slip, Validation
Presenter
ESC SYN 0
-
-
Related
commands
ESC SYN 1
-
-
ESC SYN 3
ESC SYN 4
-
-
-
-
• MICR Related Command
Class Commands
Name
Thermal
Slip, Validation
MICR
ESC FS M
MICR function
←
2-6
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3. COMMAND DETAILS
3-1) Explanation of Terms
• Reception buffer
The buffer for storing data (reception data) received from the host, as it is called the reception buffer.
Reception data is temporarily stored in the reception buffer, then processed sequentially.
• Line buffer
The buffer for storing image data for printing is called the line buffer.
• Line buffer full
The state in which the buffer has no more space available is called line buffer full. When the buffer is full in line mode,
data in the line buffer is printed and a line feed is performed when new print data is processed. This is the same as a
Line Feed. When the line buffer is full in the page mode, the printer move the print position to the head of the next line
then starts with the new print data.
• Top of line
The top of line is a state that satisfies the following conditions.
A. There is currently no print data in the line buffer.
B. The position is not specified with the horizontal direction position command.
• Printable region
This is the maximum printable area with the printer’s specifications.
• Print region
This is the printing area specified by a command.(Print region ≤ printable region)
• Print data expansion position
Bar Code
Height h dot
24 dot
40 dot
Bit image
Double
high
Bar Code
20 dot
4dot
Expanded
Base Line
A
y
8 dot
3-1
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-2) Exception processing
1) Undefined codes
Codes from <00>H to <1F>H are targeted. When codes not defined as commands in this region are received, they are
discarded.
(Ex.) If processing the data string of <30>H<31>H<03>H<32>H<0A>H<33>H, the printer will discard <03>H as an
undefined code.
2) Undefined commands
When data continuing the codes of ESC, FS, GS, DLE are codes not defined as commands, ESC, FS,GS and subse-
quent codes are discarded.
(Ex.) If processing the data string of <30>H<1B>H<22>H<31>H<32>H, the printer will read and discard
<1B>H<22>H as an undefined command.
3) Settings outside of the defined area
Processing values outside of the defined area in commands accompanying arguments, those commands are ignored
and the preset values are unchanged.
(Ex.:) If processing the data string of <1B>H<52>H<15>H, the printer will discard the data string of
<1B>H<52>H<15>H because although <1B>H<52>H is defined as a commands (ESC R) , the argument
<15>H is outside of the definition. Therefore, the international character set that is already set experiences no
change.
3-2
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3) Standard Command Details
3-3-1) Font style and character set
ESC RS F n
[Name] Select font
[Code]
ASCII
ESC
1B
RS
F
n
n
n
Hexadecimal
Decimal
1E 46
30 70
27
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 1, n = 16
Slip
-
Validation
-
[Initial Value]
Thermal
Slip
n = 0
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Select font
n
0
Font
Font-A (12 x 24 dots)
Font-B (9 x 24 dots)
OCR-B (16 x 24 dots)
1
16
When OCR-B font is selected, the following functions are invalid.
• Code Pages
• Blank Code Pages
• International Characters
• Slashed Zero
When using the OCR-B font to read characters using a scanner, cancel adornment, expansion and
external character settings. Also, check the OCR-B font by actual use.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-3
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS t n
[Name] Select code page
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC GS
t
n
n
n
1B
27
1D
74
29 116
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 21, 32 ≤ n ≤ 34, 64 ≤ n ≤ 79, n = 255
0 ≤ n ≤ 21, 32 ≤ n ≤ 34, 64 ≤ n ≤ 79, n = 255
0 ≤ n ≤ 21, 32 ≤ n ≤ 34, 64 ≤ n ≤ 79, n = 255
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Memory switch setting, when set to DBCS, Japanese characters normal katakana are fixed.
Memory switch setting, when set to DBCS, Japanese characters normal katakana are fixed.
Memory switch setting, when set to DBCS, Japanese characters normal katakana are fixed.
Validation
[Function]
n
Specifies code page
When installed with Japanese language characters and DBCS setting, this command is ignored.
Code Page
n
32
33
34
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
255
Code Page
Code Page 1252 (Windows Latin -1)
Codepage 1250 (Windows Latin-2)
Codepage 1251 (Windows Cyrillic)
Codepage 3840 (IBM-Russian)
Codepage 3841 (Gost)
0
1
Normal
CodePage437 (USA,Std. Europe)
Katakana
2
3
CodePage437 (USA, Std. Europe)
Codepage 858 (Multilingual)
Codepage 852 (Latin-2)
4
5
Codepage 3843 (Polish)
6
Codepage 860 (Portuguese)
Codepage 861 (Icelandic)
Codepage 863 (Canadian French)
Codepage 865 (Nordic)
Codepage 3844 (CS2)
7
Codepage 3845 (Hungarian)
Codepgae 3846 (Turkish)
Codepage 3847 (Brazil-ABNT)
Codepage 3848 (Brazil-ABICOMP)
Codepage 1001 (Arabic)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Codepage 866 (Cyrillic Russian)
Codepage 855 (Cyrillic Bulgarian)
Codepage 857 (Turkish)
Codepage 862 (Israel (Hebrew) )
Codepage 864 (Arabic)
Codepage 2001 (Lithuanian-KBL)
Codepage 3001 (Estonian-1)
Codepage 3002 (Estonian-2)
Codepage 3011 (Latvian-1)
Codepage 3012 (Latvian-2)
Codepage 3021 (Bulgarian)
Codepage 3041 (Maltese)
Empty page
Codepage 737 (Greek)
Codepage 851 (Greek)
Codepage 869 (Greek)
Codepage 928 (Greek)
Codepage 772 (Lithuanian)
Codepage 774 (Lithuanian)
Codepage 874 (Thai)
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-4
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS = n1 n2 da1 da2 … dak db1 db2 … dbk
[Name] Write blank code page data
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
1B
GS
=
n1 n2 da1 da2
.. dak
.. dak
.. dak
db1 db2
db1 db2
db1 db2
.. dbk
.. dbk
.. dbk
1D 3D n1 n2 da1 da2
29 61 n1 n2 da1 da2
Decimal
27
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
n1 = 0, n2 = 48, 1 ≤ (n1 + n2 x 256)
0 ≤ da ≤ 255 (Font-A data), db = 0 (Star mode does not have Font-B), k = (n1 + n2 x 256)
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
A blank code page indicates a character code table where character codes from 80h to FFh are all
blank.
A blank code page can be selected using the ESC GS t n command n = 255.
The printer is reset when writing with this command is completed.
[Font-A Data Format Vertical 24 dots x Horizontal 12 dots]
• = Data region/ ○= Zero data
(Font - A Data Format Vertical 24 dot x Horizontal 12 dot)
MSB
LSB
MSB
●
LSB
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Da1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Da2
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Da3
●
Da4
●
Da5
●
Da6
●
Da7
●
Da8
●
Da9
●
Da10
Da12
Da14
Da16
Da18
Da20
Da22
Da24
Da26
Da28
Da30
Da32
Da34
Da36
Da38
Da40
Da42
Da44
Da46
Da48
●
Da11
Da13
Da15
Da17
Da19
Da21
Da23
Da25
Da27
Da29
Da31
Da33
Da35
Da37
Da39
Da41
Da43
Da45
Da47
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
= Data Region /
= Zero Data
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only registration is possible.
Registration data is printable after switching to thermal.
3-5
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC R n
[Name] Specify international character set
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
R
n
n
n
1B 52
27 82
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 14, n = 64, 48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n ≤ 69 (”A” ≤ n ≤ “E”)
0 ≤ n ≤ 14, n = 64, 48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n ≤ 69 (”A” ≤ n ≤ “E”)
0 ≤ n ≤ 14, n = 64, 48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n ≤ 69 (”A” ≤ n ≤ “E”)
Memory switch setting
Validation
Thermal
[Initial Value]
When installed with Japanese language characters and DBCS setting: Fixed at n = 8
Memory switch setting
Slip
:
:
When installed with Japanese language characters and DBCS setting: Fixed at n = 8
Memory switch setting
Validation
When installed with Japanese language characters and DBCS setting: Fixed at n = 8
[Function]
Specifies international characters
See each printer’s product specifications manual for details on the memory switch settings.
n
International Characters
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
4, 52
5, 53
6, 54
7, 55
8, 56
9, 57
10, 65
11, 66
12, 67
13, 68
14, 69
64
USA
France
Germany
UK
Denmark
Sweden
Italy
Spain
Japan
Norway
Denmark II
Spain II
Latin America
Korea
Ireland
Legal
When installed with Japanese language characters and DBCS setting, this command is ignored.
Note that if the code page 3041 (Maltese) is selected for the code page, international characters are
disabled and the specified characters of code page 3041 are printed.
At that time, the specified international character setting is valid when changed to a different code
page.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-6
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC / N
[Name] Specify/cancel slash zero
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
/
n
n
n
1B 2F
27 47
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
Validation
Thermal
Slip
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Memory switch setting
Memory switch setting
Memory switch setting
Validation
Specifies and cancels slash zeros.
See each printer’s product specifications manual for details on the memory switch settings.
n
International Characters
Cancels slash zero
0, 48
1, 49
Specifies slash zero
Note that if the code page 3041 (Maltese) is selected for the code page, slash zero is invalid, and
normal zeros will be printed.
At that time, the specified slash zero setting is valid when changed to a different code page.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
ESC SP n
[Name] Set ANK right space
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC SP
n
n
n
1B 20
27 32
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 15, 48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n ≤ “F”)
0 ≤ n ≤ 15, 48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n ≤ “F”)
Validation
Thermal
Slip
0 ≤ n ≤ 15, 48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n ≤ “F”)
[Initial Value]
Memory switch setting
n = 0
n = 0
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies the right space for ANK 12 x 24 dot fonts in n dots.
Character spacing can be specified also with the following commands.
• Specify 12 dot pitch (ESC M)
• Specify 14 dot pitch (ESC g)
• Specify 15 dot pitch (ESC P)
• Specify 16 dot pitch (ESC :)
<Slip>, <Validation>
Specifies right space of characters with n half dots.
When in horizontal double-wide printing, the right space is also double.
(Note) The settings by this command are valid for all stations.
Setting value is shared when thermal and slip, validation line mode is selected.
The setting value when slip, validation page mode is selected is shared only when slip,
validation page mode is selected.
3-7
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC M
[Name] (Thermal) Specify 12 dot pitch/(Slip) specify 7 x 9 font (half dots) (default)
[Code]
ASCII ESC
M
4D
77
Hexadecimal
Decimal
1B
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Memory switch setting
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies the right space for ANK 12 x 24 dot fonts in 0 dots.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Specifies 7 x 9 (half) dot font.
Sets the number of printable digits in one line to [total half dot count/(10 + character right space
amount).
When page mode is selected, it is fixed at 5 x 9 fonts, and only the setting is valid.
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
(Note) The settings by this command are valid for all stations.
ESC P
[Name] (Thermal) Specify 15 dot pitch/(Slip) specify 5 x 9 font (2P-1)
[Code]
ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
P
1B 50
27 80
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
Validation
Thermal
Slip
:
-
-
-
:
:
:
:
:
[Initial Value]
Memory switch setting
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies the right space for ANK 12 x 24 dot fonts in 3 dots.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Specifies 5 x 9 (2 pulse = 1) dot fonts.
Sets the number of printable digits in one line to [total half dot count/(12 + character right space
amount).
(Note) The settings by this command are valid for all stations.
3-8
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC :
[Name] (Thermal) Specify 16 dot pitch/(Slip) specify 5 x 9 font (3P-1)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
:
1B 3A
27 58
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Memory switch setting
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies the right space for ANK 12 x 24 dot fonts in 4 dots.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Specifies 5 x 9 (3 pulse = 1) dot fonts.
Sets the number of printable digits in one line to [total half dot count/(18 + character right space
amount).
(Note) The settings by this command are valid for all stations.
ESC g
[Name] Specify 14 dot pitch
[Code] ASCII ESC
Hexadecimal
g
67
1B
27
Decimal
103
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
Slip
Validation
[Initial Value]
Thermal
Slip
Memory switch setting
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies rights space for the ANK 12 x 24 dot fonts to 2 dots.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-9
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC 6
[Name] Specify IBM character set #2
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
6
1B 36
27 54
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Two bytes ignored
ESC 7
[Name] Specify IBM character set #1
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
7
1B 37
27 55
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Two bytes ignored
3-10
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-2) Character Expansion Settings
ESC i n1 n2
[Name] Set/cancel the double wide/high
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
1B
i
n1 n2
69 n1 n2
Decimal
27 105 n1 n2
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 5, 48 ≤ n1 ≤ 53(“0” ≤ n1 ≤ “5”), 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 5, 48 ≤ n2 ≤ 53(“0” ≤ n2 ≤ “5”)
Slip
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 5, 48 ≤ n1 ≤ 53(“0” ≤ n1 ≤ “5”), 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 5, 48 ≤ n2 ≤ 53(“0” ≤ n2 ≤ “5”)
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 5, 48 ≤ n1 ≤ 53(“0” ≤ n1 ≤ “5”), 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 5, 48 ≤ n2 ≤ 53(“0” ≤ n2 ≤ “5”)
n1 = 0 (Double high cancelled), n2 = 0 (Double wide cancelled)
n1 = 0 (Double high cancelled), n2 = 0 (Double wide cancelled)
n1 = 0 (Double high cancelled), n2 = 0 (Double wide cancelled)
Validation
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
Validation
Specifies/cancels double high/wide for ANK characters and Kanji characters.
This command is ignored if either n1 or n2 is outside of the defined area.
<Thermal>
n1
Expanded high
Cancel expanded high
0, 48
1, 49
Specifies 2x expansion
2, 50
Specifies 3x expansion
3, 51
Specifies 4x expansion
4, 52
Specifies 5x expansion
5, 53
Specifies 6x expansion
n2
Expanded wide
Cancel expanded wide
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
4, 52
5, 53
Specifies 2x wide expansion
Specifies 3x wide expansion
Specifies 4x wide expansion
Specifies 5x wide expansion
Specifies 6x wide expansion
<Slip>, <Validation>
n1
0, 48
Expanded high
Expanded wide
Cancel expanded high
1 ≤ n1 ≤ 5, 49 ≤ n1 ≤ 53
Specifies 2x expansion
n2
0, 48
Cancel expanded wide
1 ≤ n2 ≤ 5, 49 ≤ n2 ≤ 53
Specifies 2x wide expansion
However, in standard specifications, only the line feed amount is doubled for font configurations of 6
x 12 IBM block graphic characters.
When slip or validation is selected, and more than double is specified, printing is doubled for every
setting.
Setting more than triple is valid after switching to thermal.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-11
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC W n
[Name] Specify/cancel expanded wide
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
W
n
n
n
1B 57
27 87
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 5, 48 ≤ n ≤ 53, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “5”)
0 ≤ n ≤ 5, 48 ≤ n ≤ 53, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “5”)
0 ≤ n ≤ 5, 48 ≤ n ≤ 53, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “5”)
n = 0 (Double wide cancelled)
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
n = 0 (Double wide cancelled)
Validation
n = 0 (Double wide cancelled)
[Function]
Specifies/cancels double wide for ANK characters and Kanji characters.
<Thermal>
n
Expanded wide
Cancel expanded wide
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
4, 52
5, 53
Specifies 2x wide expansion
Specifies 3x wide expansion
Specifies 4x wide expansion
Specifies 5x wide expansion
Specifies 6x wide expansion
<Slip>, <Validation>
n
Function
Cancels double wide expanded printing
Specifies double wide expanded printing
0, 48
1 ≤ n ≤ 5 49 ≤ n ≤ 53
When slip or validation is selected, and more than double is specified, printing is doubled for every
setting.
Setting more than triple is valid after switching to thermal.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-12
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC h n
[Name] Specify/cancel expanded high
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
h
n
n
n
68
27 104
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 5, 48 ≤ n ≤ 53, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “5”)
0 ≤ n ≤ 5, 48 ≤ n ≤ 53, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “5”)
0 ≤ n ≤ 5, 48 ≤ n ≤ 53, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “5”)
n = 0 (Double high cancelled)
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
n = 0 (Double high cancelled)
Validation
n = 0 (Double high cancelled)
Specifies/cancels double high for ANK characters and Kanji characters.
When tall expanded characters and normal printing are mixed in the same line, they are aligned at
the bottom.
<Thermal>
n
Expanded high
Cancel expanded high
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
4, 52
5, 53
Specifies 2x expansion
Specifies 3x expansion
Specifies 4x expansion
Specifies 5x expansion
Specifies 6x expansion
<Slip>, <Validation>
n
Function
Cancels printing of vertical double-high character printing.
Specifies 2x expansion printing
0, 48
1 ≤ n ≤ 5 49 ≤ n ≤ 53
However, in standard specifications, only the line feed amount is doubled for font configurations of 6
x 12 IBM block graphic characters, without expanding characters.
When slip or validation is selected, and more than double is specified, printing is doubled for every
setting.
Setting more than triple is valid after switching to thermal.
When page mode is selected, the line feed amount including the expanded double-tall characters is
1x the normal amount.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-13
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
SO
[Name] Set double wide
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
SO
0E
14
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Cancels 2x wide expansion
Cancels 2x wide expansion
Cancels 2x wide expansion
Validation
[Function]
Specifies double wide for ANK characters and Kanji characters.
This command is equivalent to ESC W 1.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
DC4
[Name]
Cancel expanded wide
[Code]
ASCII
DC4
14
Hexadecimal
Decimal
20
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Cancels 2x wide expansion
Cancels 2x wide expansion
Cancels 2x wide expansion
Validation
[Function]
Cancels expanded wide if the following commands specify expanded wide.
• Double wide specifying command (SO)
• Set/cancel double wide (ESC W)
• Set/cancel double wide/high (ESC i)
This command is equivalent to ESC W 0.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-14
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC SO
[Name] Set double high
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
1B
SO
0E
14
Decimal
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Double high expansion cancelled.
Double high expansion cancelled.
Double high expansion cancelled.
Validation
[Function]
Specifies double high for ANK characters and Kanji characters.
This command is equivalent to ESC h 1.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
ESC DC4
[Name] Cancel expanded high
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC DC4
1B
27
14
20
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Double high expansion cancelled.
Double high expansion cancelled.
Double high expansion cancelled.
Validation
Cancels expanded high if the following commands specify expanded high.
• Double high specifying command (ESC SO)
• Set/cancel the double high (ESC h)
• Set/cancel double wide/high (ESC i)
This command is equivalent to ESC h 0.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-15
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-3) Print mode
ESC E
[Name] Select emphasized printing
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
E
1B 45
27 69
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Emphasized printing cancelled.
Emphasized printing cancelled.
Emphasized printing cancelled.
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies emphasized printing for ANK characters.
IBM block ignores emphasized printing.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Specifies emphasized printing for subsequent data.
When in emphasized printing, data is printed in two passes.
This command is valid for ANK and Kanji characters (Kanji).
(* 2-pass Japanese characters are printed with four passes; 4-pass Japanese characters are
printed
with 8 passes.)
When page mode is selected, the emphasized printing specification is in page units.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-16
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC F
[Name] Cancel emphasized printing
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
F
1B 46
27 70
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Emphasized printing cancelled.
Emphasized printing cancelled.
Emphasized printing cancelled.
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Cancels emphasized printing for ANK characters.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Cancels emphasized printing for subsequent data.
When page mode is selected, the emphasized printing cancel specification is in page units.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-17
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC – n
[Name] Specify/cancel underling mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
-
n
n
n
1B 2D
27 45
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
Validation
Thermal
Slip
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
[Initial Value]
[Function]
n = 0 (Underline cancelled)
n = 0 (Underline cancelled)
n = 0 (Underline cancelled)
Validation
Specifies/cancels underline according to n value.
n
Underline
Cancels underline
0, 48
1, 49
Specifies underline
Underlines are not applied to horizontal tabs and to specified horizontal direction positions.
This command is valid for ANK characters and Japanese characters and is invalid for IBM blocks.
Underlines are valid for white/black inversion.
<Thermal>
Underlines are composed of 2 dot lines.
When character expansion is specified, underlines are also expanded (when in double-high expan-
sion, underlines are composed of four dots.)
<Slip>, <Validation>
Underlines are applied to the 9th dot of the character.
When double-wide expanded characters have been specified, the underline is also expanded, but if
double-tall expanded characters have been selected, the underline does not expand in the vertical
direction. It remains a one-dot line.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-18
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC _ n
[Name] Specify/cancel upperline
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
_
n
n
n
1B 5F
27 95
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
Validation
Thermal
Slip
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
[Initial Value]
[Function]
n = 0 (Upperline cancelled)
n = 0 (Upperline cancelled)
n = 0 (Upperline cancelled)
Validation
Specifies/cancels upperline according to n value.
n
Upperline
Cancels upperline
0, 48
1, 49
Specifies upperline
Upperlines are not applied to horizontal tabs and to specified horizontal direction positions.
This command is valid for ANK characters and Japanese characters and is invalid for IBM blocks.
Upperlines are valid for white/black inversion.
<Thermal>
Upperlines are composed of 2 dot lines.
When character expansion is specified, upperlines are also expanded (when in double-high expan-
sion, upperlines are composed of four dots.)
<Slip>, <Validation>
Upperlines are applied to the 1st dot of the character.
When double-wide expanded characters have been specified, the upperline is also expanded, but if
double-tall expanded characters have been selected, the upperline does not expand in the vertical
direction. It remains a one-dot line.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-19
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC 4
[Name] (Thermal) Specify black/white inversion/(Slip) specify black/white inversion, red/black color (substitute function)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
4
1B 34
27 52
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
White/black inversion cancelled
White/black inversion cancelled/black color printing specified
White/black inversion cancelled/black color printing specified
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies white/black inversion for ANK characters and Kanji characters.
IBM block ignores white/black inversion.
<Slip>, <Validation>
This command function is based on the selection of red/black substitute function.
The red/black substitute function is selected by the memory switch or the command ESC GS 4 m n.
For details on selecting the red/black substitute function using a command, see the explanation of
ESC GS 4 below, and for details on selecting the red/black substitute function using the memory
switch, see the printer specifications manual.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
ESC 5
[Name] (Thermal) Cancel black/white inversion/(Slip) cancel black/white inversion, red/black color (substitute function)
[Code] ASCII ESC
Hexadecimal
Decimal
5
1B 35
27 53
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
White/black inversion cancelled
White/black inversion cancelled/black color printing specified
White/black inversion cancelled/black color printing specified
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Cancels white/black inversion for ANK characters and Kanji characters.
<Slip>, <Validation>
This command function is based on the selection of red/black substitute function.
The red/black substitute function is selected by the memory switch or the command ESC GS 4 m n.
For details on selecting the red/black substitute function using a command, see the explanation of
ESC GS 4 below, and for details on selecting the red/black substitute function using the memory
switch, see the printer specifications manual.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-20
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS 4 m n
[Name] Select red/black substitute function [ESC 4/5 setting]
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
1B
GS
4
m
m
m
n
n
n
1D 34
29 52
Decimal
27
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
-
Slip
m = 1, 2, 49, 50
When m = 1, 49 (“1”)
When m = 2, 50 (“2”)
:n = 0 to 3, 255
:n = 0, 2 to 5
:n = 0, 1
When m = 83 (“S”)
m = 1, 2, 49, 50
Validation
:
When m = 1, 49 (“1”)
When m = 2, 50 (“2”)
:n = 0 to 3, 255
:n = 0, 2 to 5
:n = 0, 1
When m = 83 (“S”)
-
[Initial Value]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
Memory switch setting
Memory switch setting
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to slip or validation.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Selects red/black substitute function
Selects characters targeted for adornment with m = 1 (ANK) or m = 2 (Japanese characters), and
selects the ESC 4/ESC 5 command functions with n.
Sets the handling of adornment to space characters (ASCII 20Hex) with m = 83.
This command is enabled only when in a state where adornment is cancelled by ESC 4 (when ESC
5 was specified).
• When m = 1, 48 Targeted characters = ANK
m
n
0
ESC 4/ESC 5 command functions (ANK)
White/black inverted printing (1 Pass)
1, 49
1, 49
1, 49
1, 49
1, 49
1
<Option 1> White/black inversion (5 x 9 font print) + enhancing (2 passes)
<Option 2> Upper line + Underline + enhancing (2 passes)
<Option 3> Upper line + Underline + double tall expanded + enhancing (4 passes)
No adornment
2
3
255
• When m = 2, 50 Targeted characters = Japanese Characters
m
n
0
2
3
4
5
ESC 4/ESC 5 command functions (Japanese characters)
2, 50
2, 50
2, 50
2, 50
2, 50
No adornment
<Option 2> Upper line + Underline + enhancing (4 passes)
<Option 3> Upper line + Underline + double tall expanded + enhancing (4 passes)
<Option 4> White/Black Inverted + Double-Tall (2 passes)
<Option 5> White/Black Inverted + 4 X Expanded (2 passes)
When using ESC 5 to cancel adornments, it returns to the previously set adornments. (Adornments
such as underline, upper line, double-tall expanded and enhancing are cancelled if there is no com-
mand to set them (for example the ESC - -1 specification for underlines).
3-21
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Precautions for selecting <Option 1>
1. Prints white/black inverted characters using 5 x 9 fonts regardless of the current font size setting.
2. Inserts a one dot string of black printing to the head of the white/black inverted characters.
3. Printing data created on a conventional red/black printer, using 1 and 2 above, there are cases in which the print-
ing position will shift to the right and a line of printable characters reduced.
4. Download registered characters defined with 5 x 9 fonts are printed regardless of the current font setting (7 x 9/5
x 9).
5. Must not set “ANK default dot count = Narrow” with the memory switch. (This will cause a white line to appear
between characters.)
Precautions for selecting <Option 2> and <Option 3>
1. Do not apply an upper line or an underline when rotating 90 or 270 degrees.
• When m = 83 Red/black adornment of ANK space characters (20H).
m
83
83
n
0
1
Red adornment of ANK space characters (20H).
Adorn
Do not adorn
This parameter specifies whether to adorn red/black for ANK space characters in red printing mode (black/white in-
verted).
The ANK space characters are limited to ASCII code 20H in this setting.
In the character code table, if 7FHex is a space character, 7FHex is a target for this setting.
The following is an example of each setting.
It is possible to avoid unnecessary adornment in printing patterns that provide spacing of printing positions with ANK
space characters (20H) when red is specified.
(Print Example)
Print Data: <ESC> “4” “TOTAL” 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H “$1234” <LF>
<Condition 1> ANK adornment = “black/white inverted printing,” ANK space characters = “red/black adornment”
TOTAL
<Condition 2> ANK adornment = “black/white inverted printing,” ANK space characters = “no red/black adornment”
TOTAL $1234
$1234
3-22
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
SI
[Name] Select upside-down printing
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal 0F
Decimal 15
SI
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
Slip
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Upside-down printing cancelled
Upside-down printing cancelled
Upside-down printing cancelled
Validation
Specifies upside-down printing
This command is enabled only when at the top of the line.
Upside down and right-side up characters cannot both exist in the same line.
This command is enabled for following.
• ANK characters
• Kanji characters
• Bit images
• Logos
• Bar codes
<Slip>, <Validation>
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
(Note) The settings by this command are valid for all stations.
DC2
[Name] Cancel upside-down printing
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
DC2
12
18
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Upside-down printing cancelled
Upside-down printing cancelled
Upside-down printing cancelled
Validation
Cancels upside-down printing
This command is enabled only when at the top of the line.
(Note) The settings by this command are valid for all stations.
3-23
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC RS i n
[Name] Specify/cancel character rotated mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
RS
1E
i
n
n
n
69
27
30 105
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
0 ≤ n ≤ 2, 48 ≤ n ≤ 50, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “2”)
0 ≤ n ≤ 2, 48 ≤ n ≤ 50, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “2”)
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Character rotation cancelled (n = 0)
Character rotation cancelled (n = 0)
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to slip or validation.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Specifies direction to rotate print (clockwise) or to cancel rotation for subsequent data, according to
the n value.
n
Set rotation
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
Cancelled (0° rotation)
270° rotation
90° rotation
Rotated characters cannot be applied with underlines or upperlines.
The relationship between double-tall and double-wide is reverse to when cancelled when rotating.
When in Kanji character mode, rotation is effective for both ANK characters and Japanese charac-
ters.
Kanji character spacing is always applied with the two-byte Kanji character spacing value.
In standard specifications, rotation of IBM block is changed to vertical 8 dot fonts.
The following are precautions for 7 x 9 font character font specification.
• Characters are printed with 5 x 9 fonts (2P=1).
• Download characters registered with 5 x 9 fonts are printed.
• When rotation is cancelled, the characters return to 7 x 9 fonts. (When there is not 5 x 9 specifica-
tion while rotation is specified.)
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
3-24
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-4) Line Spacing
LF
[Name] Line feed
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal 0A
Decimal 10
LF
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
Slip
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Memory switch setting
1/6 inch line feed
1/6 inch line feed
Validation
[Function]
Feeds the currently specified amount of paper.
If print data exists in the line buffer, it prints that data.
<Thermal>
Initial value of line feed amount is set by the memory switch.
CR
[Name] Carriage return (Print line feed)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
CR
0D
13
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Memory switch setting
Memory switch setting
Memory switch setting
Validation
Specifies the function according to the memory switch value.
See each printer’s product specifications manual for details on the memory switch settings.
<Thermal>
Memory SW
Condition (1)
Condition (2)
Function
Ignored
Same as the LF code.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Memory SW
Function
Condition (1)
Condition (2)
Condition (3)
Ignored
Same as the LF code.
Executes only printing, with no paper feed.
3-25
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC a n
[Name] Feed paper n lines
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
a
1B 61
27 97
n
n
n
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 127
1 ≤ n ≤ 127
1 ≤ n ≤ 127
Memory switch setting
1/6 inch
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
1/6 inch
Executes paper feed of (currently specified line feed amount x n).
If print data exists in the line buffer, it prints that data.
This paper feed amount is unaffected even if there are vertical expanded characters in one line.
3-26
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC z n
[Name] Select line feed amount
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
z
7A
n
n
n
27
122
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
n = 1, 49
n = 0, 1, n = 48, 49
n = 0, 1, n = 48, 49
Memory switch setting
1/6 inch
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
1/6 inch
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies the line feed amount.
n
Amount of Line Feed
1, 49
Specifies 4 mm line feed amount
<Slip>, <Validation>
Specifies the line feed amount.
n
Amount of Line Feed
Specifies 1/12 inch line feed amount
Specifies 1/6 inch line feed amount
0, 48
1, 49
Line feed amounts can be set independently for both line mode and page mode.
ESC 0
[Name] (Thermal) Specify 3 mm line feed amount/(Slip) specify 1/8 line feed amount
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
0
1B 30
27 48
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Memory switch setting
1/6 inch
Validation
1/6 inch
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies the line feed amount to 3 mm.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Specifies the line feed amount to 1/8 inch.
Line feed amounts can be set independently for both line mode and page mode.
3-27
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC 1
[Name] (Thermal) Specify 3 mm line feed amount/(Slip) specify 7/72 inch line feed amount
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1
1B 31
27 49
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Memory switch setting
1/6 inch
Validation
1/6 inch
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies the line feed amount to 3 mm.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Specifies the line feed amount to 7/72 in.
Line feed amounts can be set independently for both line mode and page mode.
ESC J n
[Name] (Thermal) n/4 mm line feed/(Slip) execute n/72 line feed one time
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
J
n
n
n
1B 4A
27 74
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
Validation
Thermal
Slip
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
[Initial Value]
[Function]
-
-
-
Validation
Execute paper feed.
If print data exists in the line buffer, it prints that data.
This paper feed amount is unaffected even if there are vertical expanded characters in one line.
The single line feed amount setting value is not changed by this command.
<Thermal>
Executes a n/4mm paper feed.
Using this command will intermittently feed paper, therefore, it is normally recommended that this
command not be used.
(Currently set line feed amount –n/4 mm) portion is not printed.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Executes a n/72 in paper feed.
3-28
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC j n
[Name] Reverse paper feed
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
j
6A
n
n
n
27
106
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
Slip
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
Validation
Thermal
Slip
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
[Initial Value]
-
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Three bytes ignored
<Slip>, <Validation>
Executes a n/72 in reverse direction paper feed.
If print data exists in the line buffer, it prints that data.
This paper feed amount is unaffected even if there are vertical expanded characters in one line.
The single line feed amount setting value is not changed by this command.
ESC I n
[Name] Executes (thermal) n/8 mm line feed/(slip) n/144 line feed one time.
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
I
n
n
n
1B 49
27 73
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
Validation
Thermal
Slip
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
[Initial Value]
[Function]
-
-
Validation
:
-
Executes paper feed.
If print data exists in the line buffer, it prints that data.
This paper feed amount is unaffected even if there are vertical expanded characters in one line.
The single line feed amount setting value is not changed by this command.
<Thermal>
Executes a n/8 mm paper feed.
Using this command will intermittently feed paper, therefore, it is normally recommended that this
command not be used.
(Currently set line feed amount –n/8mm) portion is not printed.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Executes a n/144 in paper feed.
3-29
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC A n
[Name] Defines (thermal) a 3 mm/4 mm line feed amount/Defines (slip) n/72 inch pitch line feed
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
A
n
n
n
1B 41
27 65
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ n ≤ 85
Validation
Thermal
Slip
0 ≤ n ≤ 85
[Initial Value]
[Function]
-
-
-
Validation
Defines the line feed amount.
The line feed amount defined using this command is specified to the current line feed amount by the
ESC 2 command.
<Thermal>
n
Amount of Line Feed
Defines a 3 mm line feed amount
0 ≤ n ≤ 9
10 ≤ n
Defines a 4 mm line feed amount
<Slip>, <Validation>
Defines line feed amount for one line as n/72 inch.
Line feed amounts can be set independently for both line mode and page mode.
ESC 2
[Name] Specify line feed amount (ESC A n)
[Code] ASCII ESC
Hexadecimal
2
1B 32
27 50
Decimal
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
Slip
-
Validation
-
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
Memory switch setting
1/6 inch line feed
1/6 inch line feed
Validation
Specifies the line feed amount to the value defined by ESC A n.
3-30
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC 3 n
[Name] Specify n/216 inch paper feed
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
3
n
n
n
1B 33
27 51
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
1/6 inch line feed
1/6 inch line feed
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Three bytes ignored
<Slip>, <Validation>
Sets subsequent line feed amounts to a value approximate to n/216 inch.
Because the minimum pitch for the paper feed mechanism is 1/144 of an inch, the setting value will
be approximated according to the following equation.
INT (n x 2/3 + 0.5)/144 of an inch
Line feed amounts can be set independently for both line mode and page mode.
ESC y n
[Name] Specify n/144 inch paper feed
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
y
79
n
n
n
27
121
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
1/6 inch line feed
1/6 inch line feed
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Three bytes ignored
<Slip>, <Validation>
Sets subsequent line feed amounts to a n/144 inch.
Line feed amounts can be set independently for both line mode and page mode.
3-31
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-5) Page Control Commands
FF
[Name] Form feed
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal 0C
Decimal 12
FF
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Slip
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Executes a form feed.
If the current position is at the top of the page, it form feeds to the top of the next page.
If there is data existing in the line buffer when executing a form feed, it prints that data, then ex-
ecutes the form feed.
However, by printing data remaining in the buffer, and moving to the top of the next page, a form
feed is considered to have been executed, so form feed is not performed.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Refer to the “Page Mode Command Details.”
3-32
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC C n
[Name] Set page length to n lines
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
C
n
n
n
1B 43
27 67
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 127
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
(Form feed amount initial value x 42)
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
The position whereat this command is processed is considered the top of the page and sets the
page length to (current form feed amount x n).
This command cancels the bottom margin setting when setting page length.
The page length set using this command is unaffected by changing the form feed amount later.
Moving to the top of the page is performed using the following commands.
• Form feed command (FF):
Execute form feed
• Cutter command (ESC d n): Sets cutter position at top of page.
• Raster command (ESC * r B):Top of page when raster mode ends.
• Error cancel operations:
Sets error cancel operation end position at the top of the page.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-33
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC C 0 n
[Name] Set n x 24 mm page length
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
1B 43 00
27 67
C
0
n
n
n
Decimal
0
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 22
Slip
-
-
Validation
[Initial Value]
Thermal
Slip
(Form feed amount initial value x 42)
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
The position whereat this command is processed is considered the top of the page and sets the
page length to (n x 24 mm).
This command cancels the bottom margin setting when setting page length.
The page length set using this command is unaffected by changing the form feed amount later.
Moving to the top of the page is performed using the following commands.
• Form feed command (FF):
Execute form feed
• Cutter command (ESC d n): Sets cutter position at top of page.
• Raster command (ESC * r B):Top of page when raster mode ends.
• Error cancel operations:
Sets error cancel operation end position at the top of the page.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-34
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
VT
[Name] Feed paper to vertical tab position
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal 0B
Decimal 11
VT
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Slip
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Feeds paper to the next vertical tab position.
This command is ignored if there are no tabs set.
If a vertical tab is set, and the current position is the same as the vertical tab position, or if it is below
that position, it feeds paper to the top of the next page.
If data exists in the line buffer when feeing paper to the vertical tab position, it executes the paper
feed to the vertical tab position after printing that data.
However, if moved to the vertical tab position by printing data remaining in the buffer, the move to
the vertical tab position is considered to have been executed, so a move to the next vertical tab posi-
tion is not performed.
There is no initial value for the vertical tab.
<Slip>, <Validation>
One byte ignored
3-35
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC B n1 n2 … nk NUL
[Name] Set vertical tab position
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
B
n1 n2
.. nk NUL
1B 42 n1 n2
27 66 n1 n2
.. nk
.. nk
00
0
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n ≤ 16
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets the vertical tab to the (current form feed amount x n) position.
All other vertical tabs set before setting the vertical tab using this command are cancelled.
A maximum of 16 vertical tabs can be set. However, the tab position must satisfy the condition of 1 ≤
n1 ≤ n2 ... ≤ nk.
When receiving such an illegal code, tabs up to the illegal code are set, but those after the illegal
code are discarded up to the NUL code so illegal code tab are not set.
The vertical tab set using this command is unaffected by changing the form feed amount later.
Vertical tabs set using the ESC B NUL command are cleared.
There is no initial value for the vertical tab.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
ESC B NUL
[Name] Clear vertical tab position
[Code] ASCII ESC
Hexadecimal
Decimal
B
NUL
00
0
1B 42
27 66
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Clears the currently set vertical tab.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-36
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-6) Horizontal Direction Printing Position
ESC l n
[Name] Set left margin
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
l
6C
n
n
n
27
108
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
Slip
0 ≤ n ≤ (right margin -2) ≤ 255
Validation
Thermal
Slip
0 ≤ n ≤ (right margin -2) ≤ 255
[Initial Value]
[Function]
n = 0
n = 0
n = 0
Validation
Uses the left edge as a standard to set the left margin (current ANK character pitch x n).
Setting this command partway will take affect from the next line.
Character spacing is included in the character pitch but is unaffected by expansion settings.
The left margin set using this command is unaffected by changing the character pitch.
<Thermal>
The right edge is also the reference for upside-down printing.
This command is ignored if settings are for a printing region less than 36 mm.
<Slip>, <Validation>
The left edge is also the reference for upside-down printing.
The left margin must be at least a minimum of 18 dots therebetween with the right margin. (*1)
If the printable region as set by the left and right margins is smaller than one character, including
the space between characters, printing is not possible. A question mark (?) is printed instead of the
character.
(*1) More than four characters of 7 x 9 fonts; more than three characters of 5 x 9 fonts (2P=1)
(when character spacing = 0)
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
Printable Region
Left Margin
㩷 㩷
Print Region
Right Margin
㩷
3-37
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC Q n
[Name] Set right margin
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
Q
n
n
n
1B 51
27 81
Decimal
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
2 ≤ n ≤ maximum printable digits ≤ 255
2 ≤ n ≤ maximum printable digits ≤ 255
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Maximum printable digits
Maximum printable digits
Validation
[Function]
Uses the left edge as a standard to set the print region as (current ANK character pitch x n).
Setting this command partway will take affect from the next line.
Character spacing is included in the character pitch but is unaffected by expansion settings.
The left margin set using this command is unaffected by changing the character pitch.
<Thermal>
The right edge is also the reference for upside-down printing.
This command is ignored if settings are for a printing region less than 36 mm.
<Slip>, <Validation>
The left edge is also the reference for upside-down printing.
The print region within the defined range must be at least a minimum of 18 dots for the right margin.
If the printable region as set by the left and right margins is smaller than one character, including
the space between characters, printing is not possible. A question mark (?) is printed instead of the
character.
(*1)
More than four characters of 7 x 9 fonts; more than three characters of 5 x 9 fonts (2P=1)
(when character spacing = 0)
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
Printable Region
Left Margin
Print Region
Right Margin
3-38
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
HT
[Name] Move horizontal tab
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal 09
Decimal
HT
9
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Move print position to next horizontal tab position.
The current position moves to the next tab position when at the horizontal tab position.
This command is ignored with under the following conditions.
• When there is no horizontal tab set.
• When the current position is the same as the furthest right horizontal tab position or to the right of it.
There is no initial value for the horizontal tab.
In the underline/upperline modes, underlines and upperlines are not printed in the spaces created by
a horizontal tab.
ESC D n1 n2 … nk NUL
[Name] Set horizontal tab
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
D
n1 n2
.. nk NUL
1B 44 n1 n2
27 68 n1 n2
.. nk
.. nk
00
0
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n ≤ 32
1 ≤ n ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n ≤ 32
Validation
Thermal
Slip
1 ≤ n ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n ≤ 32
[Initial Value]
[Function]
-
-
-
Validation
Uses the left edge as a standard to set the horizontal tab to the position of (current ANK character
pitch x n).
The horizontal tab reference point is the right edge of the paper, regardless of the left margin.
ANK character pitches, including right spaces, are unaffected by expansion settings.
The right edge is also the reference for upside-down printing.
All other horizontal tabs set before setting the horizontal tab using this command are cancelled
A maximum of 32 horizontal tabs can be set.
However, the tab position must satisfy the following conditions.
If the following conditions are not met, data up to the NUL code is discarded.
Normal tabs that meet the conditions below are set and tabs after errors occur are not set.
• 1 < n1 < n2 … < nk
The horizontal tab set using this command is unaffected by changing the character pitch.
Horizontal tabs set using the ESC D NUL command are cleared.
There is no initial value for the horizontal tab.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-39
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC D NUL
[Name] Clear horizontal tab
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
D
NUL
00
0
1B 44
27 68
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Clears the currently set horizontal tab.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
ESC GS A n1 n2
[Name] Move absolute position
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
A
n1 n2
1D 41 n1 n2
29 65 n1 n2
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255
Validation
Thermal
Slip
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255
[Initial Value]
[Function]
-
-
-
Validation
Moves the printing position from the left margin to the (n1 + n2 x 256) dot position.
This command is ignored if the print region is exceeded.
The right margin is also the reference for upside-down printing.
<Thermal>
The left margin is also the reference for upside-down printing.
<Slip>, <Validation>
The right margin is also the reference for upside-down printing.
3-40
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS R n1 n2
[Name] Move relative position
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
R
n1 n2
1D 52 n1 n2
29 82 n1 n2
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255
Slip
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255
Validation
Thermal
Slip
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255
[Initial Value]
[Function]
-
-
-
Validation
Moves the printing position from the current position to the (n1 + n2 x 256) dot position.
This command is ignored if the print region is exceeded.
When (n1 + n2 x 256) ≥ 32768, it moves {65536 – (n1 + n2 x 256)} dots in the left direction.
When (n1 + n2 x 256) < 32768, it moves (n1 + n2 x 256)} dots in the right direction.
The right margin is also the reference for upside-down printing.
<Thermal>
The left margin is also the reference for upside-down printing.
<Slip>, <Validation>
The right margin is also the reference for upside-down printing.
3-41
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS a n
[Name] Specify position alignment
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC GS
a
n
n
n
1B
27
1D 61
29 97
Decimal
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 2, 48 ≤ n ≤ 50, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “2”)
Slip
0 ≤ n ≤ 2, 48 ≤ n ≤ 50, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “2”)
Validation
0 ≤ n ≤ 2, 48 ≤ n ≤ 50, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “2”)
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
n = 0
n = 0
n = 0
Validation
This specifies position alignment for all print data in one line, in the set print region.
n
Position alignment
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
Left alignment
Center alignment
Right alignment
<Slip>, <Validation>
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
(Note) The settings by this command are valid for all stations.
ABC
ABCD
<ESC><GS>” a” 0
ABCDE
ABC
<ESC><GS>“a” 1
ABCD
ABCDE
ABC
ABCD
<ESC><GS>“ a” 2
ABCDE
3-42
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-7) Download
ESC & c1 c2 n d1 . . . d48
[Name] Register 12 x 24 dot font download characters
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
&
c1 c2
n
n
n
d1
d1
d1
..
..
..
d48
d48
d48
1B 26 c1 c2
27 38 c1 c2
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
c1 = 1, 49, c2 = 1, 49, 32 ≤ n ≤ 127, 0 ≤ d ≤ 255
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Registers 12 x 24 dot font download characters to the nth address.
Download characters can be registered to <20>H to <7F>H. (96 characters can be registered for
each font.)
Those already registered to these addresses are overwritten.
When parameters c1 and c2 and n are outside of the defined area, subsequent data is handled as
normal data.
Horizontal
12 dot
d1
d3
d5
d7
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
d2
d4
d6
d8
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
d9
d10
d12
d14
d16
d18
d20
d22
d24
d26
d28
d30
d32
d34
d36
d38
d40
d42
d44
d46
d48
d11
d13
d15
d17
d19
d21
d23
d25
d27
d29
d31
d33
d35
d37
d39
d41
d43
d45
d47
Vertical
24 dot
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
● : Font data
○ : Invalid data
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only registration is possible.
Registration data is printable after switching to thermal.
3-43
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC & c1 c2 n
[Name] Delete 12 x 24 dot font download characters
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
&
c1 c2
n
n
n
1B 26 c1 c2
27 38 c1 c2
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
c1 = 1, 49, c2 = 0, 48, 32 ≤ n ≤ 127
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Deletes 12 x 24 dot font download characters registered to the nth address.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Deleting is possible.
3-44
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC & NUL n1 n2 [m d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 (d6 d7)] n2 - n1 + 1
[Name] Register download characters
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
&
NUL n1 n2 [m d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 (d6 d7)] n2 - n1 + 1
00 n1 n2 [m d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 (d6 d7)] n2 - n1 + 1
1B 26
27 38
0
n1 n2 [m d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 (d6 d7)] n2 - n1 + 1
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
33 ≤ n1 ≤ n2 ≤ 127 (21h ≤ n1 ≤ n2 ≤ 7Fh), m = 0, 128 (00h, 80h), 0 ≤ d1 to d7 ≤ 255
Validation
Thermal
Slip
33 ≤ n1 ≤ n2 ≤ 127 (21h ≤ n1 ≤ n2 ≤ 7Fh), m = 0, 128 (00h, 80h), 0 ≤ d1 to d7 ≤ 255
[Initial Value]
-
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Only registration is possible.
Registration data is printable after switching to slip or validation.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Registers download characters to the specified character code.
A maximum of 22 download characters can be registered for 7 x 9 and 5 x 9 fonts.
The range of the location to write download characters is specified by n1 and n2. (When there is one
character to register, n1 = n2.)
If one has been already registered to an address, it is overwritten.
This command registers download characters independent to each font.
m indicates the relationship of the character pattern and the print head (see figure below).
Definition data (d1 to d7) set the bits that correspond to the dots to print to “1,” and the bits that cor-
respond to the dots that are not printed to “0.”
Even if ESC @ (command initialization) is executed, the registered download character is not
cleared.
Registered data is shared by slip and validation.
Relationship of character pattern data and print head.
Upper
Lower
D1
1. When m = 0 (00h)
D3
D8 D7
D6 D5
D4
D2
Pin No
(Not Used)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Upper
D8 D7
Lower
D1
D3
D6 D5
D4
D2
2. When m = 128 (80h)
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
(Not Used)
(Note) • When registering 7 x 9 fonts, dots adjacent in the horizontal direction do not print.
•When character rotation is specified, 7 x 9 font registered characters cannot be
printed. 5 x 9 font characters are always printed.
3-45
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
[Ex.:] When selecting 7 x 9 fonts, and defining the character to 21H:
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
7 dot
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㪤㪪㪙㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
d4
d5
d7
d1 d2 d3
d6
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㪣㪪㪙㩷
ESC & NUL n1 n2 m d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7
Code (Hexadecimal) 1B 26 00 21 21 80 3E 40 88 00 88 40 3E
(1 when printing corresponding bits, and 0 for no print))
[Ex.:] When selecting 5 x 9 fonts, and defining the character to 21H:
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
5 dot
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
MSB㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
d1㩷
d2㩷
d3㩷
d4㩷
d5㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
LSB㩷
ESC & NUL n1 n2 m d1 d2 d3 d4 d5
Code (Hexadecimal) 1B 26 00 21 21 00 38 45 45 45 7E
(1 when printing corresponding bits, and 0 for no print))
3-46
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC % N
[Name] Specify/cancel ANK download characters
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
%
n
n
n
1B 25
27 37
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
Validation
Thermal
Slip
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
[Initial Value]
Cancel ANK download character
Cancel ANK download character
Cancel ANK download character
Validation
[Function]
n
Specifies/cancels ANK download characters
Download characters
0, 48
Cancel ANK download characters
Specify ANK download characters
1, 49
<Print example of download characters>
1. Registration of ANK download character (ESC & c1 c2 n d1…d48)
2. Specify ANK download characters (ESC % n (n = 1))
3. Print ANK download characters
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-47
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-8) Bit Image Graphics
ESC K n1 n2 d1 … dk
[Name] Standard density bit image
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
K
n1 n2 d1
.. dk
.. dk
.. dk
1B 4B n1 n2 d1
27 75 n1 n2 d1
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
1 ≤ {(n1 + n2 x 256) x 3} ≤ printable region
k = (n1 + n2 x 256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Slip
:
1 ≤ (n1 + n2 x 256) ≤ printable region (total dot count)
k = (n1 + n2 x 256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Validation
:
1 ≤ (n1 + n2 x 256) ≤ printable region (total dot count)
k = (n1 + n2 x 256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
[Initial Value]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
-
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Prints bit images using 3 dots wide and 3 dots high per 1 dot of input data.
The following shows the details of data processing with this command.
• When {(n1 + n2 x 256) x 3} exceeds the printable region, only the data in the printing region is
printed.
• When {(n1 + n2 x 256) x 3} exceeds the currently set printable region, only the data in the printing
region is printed.
At this time, all data for the print region is discarded.
• If the current position already exceeds the print region, this command discards all data.
b3 b2
b1 b0
b7 b6 b5 b4
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
䊶 䊶 䊶
3-48
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
<Slip>, <Validation>
This command prints bit images with only the data count determined by n1.
The amount of data that can be printed in one line is limited to the total dot count. Data that exceeds
the total dot count or the right margin is ignored.
See each printer’s product specifications manual for details regarding the total dot count.
After printing the bit image, the printer automatically returns to the character mode.
The following drawing shows the relationship of the print head needle wires and the data.
Upper
b8 b7
Lower
b1
b3
b6
b5
b4
b2
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
(Not Used)
3-49
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC L n1 n2 d1 … dk
[Name] High density bit image
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
L
n1 n2 d1
.. dk
.. dk
.. dk
1B 4C n1 n2 d1
27 76 n1 n2 d1
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
1 ≤ {(n1 + n2 x 256) ≤ printable region
k = (n1 + n2 x 256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Slip
1 ≤ (n1 + n2 x 256) ≤ printable region (total half-dot count)
k = (n1 + n2 x 256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Validation
1 ≤ (n1 + n2 x 256) ≤ printable region (total half-dot count)
k = (n1 + n2 x 256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
[Initial Value]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
-
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Prints bit images using 1 dots wide and 3 dots high per 1 dot of input data.
The following shows the details of data processing with this command.
• When (n1 + n2 x 256) exceeds the printable region, only data in the print region is printed.
• When (n1 + n2 x 256) exceeds the currently set printable region, only the data in the printing re-
gion is printed.
At this time, all data for the print region is discarded.
• If the current position already exceeds the print region, this command discards all data.
b3 b2
b1 b0
b7 b6 b5 b4
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
<Slip>, <Validation>
This command executes the bit image of a density doubled (half dot printing) for just the data count
determined by n1 and n2.
The amount of data that can be printed in one line is only the total half-dot count. Data that exceeds
the total half-dot count or the right margin is ignored.
See each printer’s product specifications manual for details regarding the total half-dot count.
The relationship of the print head needle wires and the data is the same as ESC K (standard density
bit image).
When printing double-density bit images, dots adjacent in the horizontal direction do not print.
After printing the bit image, the printer automatically returns to the character mode.
When page mode is selected, all data is received and discarded.
3-50
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC k n1 n2 d1 … dk
[Name] Fine bit image
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
k
n1 n2 d1
.. dk
.. dk
.. dk
6B n1 n2 d1
107 n1 n2 d1
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
n2 = 0
1 ≤ {(n1 + n2 x 256) x 8} ≤ printable region
k = {(n1 + n2 x 256) x 24}
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Prints bit images using 1 dots wide and 1 dots high per 1 dot of input data.
The following shows the details of data processing with this command.
• When {(n1 + n2 x 256) x 8} exceeds the printable region, only the data in the printing region is
printed.
• When {(n1 + n2 x 256) x 8} exceeds the currently set printable region, only the data in the printing
region is printed.
At this time, all data for the print region is discarded.
• If the current position already exceeds the print region, this command discards all data.
x byte =(n1 + n2 x 256)
d1
d2
dX
dX x 1 + 1
dX x 2 + 1
dX x 1 + 2
dX x 2 + 2
dX x 2
dX x 3
24 dot
dX x 24
dX x 23 + 1
dX x 23 + 2
bit1
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2
bit0
<Slip>, <Validation>
All data received and discarded.
3-51
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC X n1 n2 d1 … dk
[Name] Fine density bit image (Wire-dot, 24 pin compatible)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
X
n1 n2 d1
.. dk
.. dk
.. dk
1B 58 n1 n2 d1
27 88 n1 n2 d1
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
1 ≤ (n1 + n2 x 256) ≤ printable region
k = {(n1 + n2 x 256) x 3}
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Prints input bit images with 8 dots/mm resolution for both horizontal and vertical.
The following shows the details of data processing with this command.
• When {(n1 + n2 x 256) x 3} exceeds the printable region, only the data in the printing region is
printed.
• When {(n1 + n2 x 256) x 3} exceeds the currently set printable region, only the data in the printing
region is printed.
At this time, all data for the print region is discarded.
• If the current position already exceeds the print region, this command discards all data.
b7 b6
b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b7 b6
b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b7 b6
b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b5
b5
b5
<Slip>, <Validation>
All data received and discarded.
3-52
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC ^ m n1 n2 d1 d2 … dk
[Name] 9 Dot bit image
[Code]
ASCII
ESC
^
m
m
m
n1 n2 d1 d2
n1 n2 d1 d2
n1 n2 d1 d2
.. dk
.. dk
.. dk
Hexadecimal
Decimal
1B 5E
27 94
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
0 ≤ m ≤ 1 (“0” ≤ m ≤ “1”)
Validation
Thermal
Slip
0 ≤ m ≤ 1 (“0” ≤ m ≤ “1”)
[Initial Value]
-
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
All data received and discarded.
<Slip>, <Validation>
This command prints bit images with only the data count determined by n1, and n2 at standard or
double density.
Specify the horizontal print dot count (row) using n1 + n2 x 256 dots.
• m = 0:
Print standard density 9 dot bit images.
The maximum number of dots in the horizontal direction is the total number of dots.
Print double density 9 dot bit images.
• m = 1:
The maximum number of dots in the horizontal direction is the total number of half
dots.
Dots adjacent in the horizontal direction do not print.
When page mode is selected, all data is received and discarded.
(Note) • Data exceeding the maximum number of dots or the right margin is ignored.
• Total number of dots and total number of half-dots follows the memory switch setting.
(See the specifications manual)
• If m is outside of the definition, data after n1 is processed as normal data.
• When printing of the bit image is ended, the system returns to normal data processing.
The following drawing shows the relationship of the print head needle wires and the data.
dn: 1 to 8 pin data
MSB
b7
LSB
b0
b2
b6
b5
b4
b3
b1
Pin No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
b7
b6 b5
b4
b3 b2
b1
b0
MSB
LSB
dn + 1: 9 pin data
3-53
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-9) Logo
ESC FS q n [x11 x12 y11 y12 d1 … dk]1 … [xn1 xn2 yn1 yn2 d1 … dk] n
[Name] Register logo
ESC
1B
FS
1C
q
n
n
n
[x11 x12 y11 y12 d1 .. dk]1 .. [xn1
[x11 x12 y11 y12 d1 .. dk]1 .. [xn1
[x11 x12 y11 y12 d1 .. dk]1 .. [xn1
xn2
xn2
xn2
yn1 yn2 d1 .. dk]n
yn1 yn2 d1 .. dk]n
yn1 yn2 d1 .. dk]n
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
71
27
28 113
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ xn1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ xn2 ≤ 3 1 ≤ (xn1 + xn2 x 256) ≤ 1023
0 ≤ yn1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ yn2 ≤ 1 1 ≤ (yn1 + yn2 x 256) ≤ 288
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = {(xn1 + xn2 x 256) x (yn1 + yn2 x 256) x 8}
Slip
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ xn1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ xn2 ≤ 3 1 ≤ (xn1 + xn2 x 256) ≤ 1023
0 ≤ yn1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ yn2 ≤ 1 1 ≤ (yn1 + yn2 x 256) ≤ 288
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = {(xn1 + xn2 x 256) x (yn1 + yn2 x 256) x 8}
Validation
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ xn1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ xn2 ≤ 3 1 ≤ (xn1 + xn2 x 256) ≤ 1023
0 ≤ yn1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ yn2 ≤ 1 1 ≤ (yn1 + yn2 x 256) ≤ 288
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = {(xn1 + xn2 x 256) x (yn1 + yn2 x 256) x 8}
No registration
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
No registration
Validation
No registration
Register logo
Parameter details
• n:
Specifies registered logo count
• xn1, xn2:
• yn1, yn2:
• d:
Horizontal size of registered logo {(xn1 + xn2 x 256) x 8} dots
Vertical size of registered logo {(yn1 + yn2 x 256) x 8} dots
Registered logo data
• k:
Logo data count
This command should be specified at the top of the line.
When the first parameter is determined to be free of error, the printer starts processing this com-
mand.
When logo register processing starts, all previously defined data is deleted.(It is not possible to re-
register a portion of a plurality of defined logo data.)
Logo registration numbers are defined in rising order from 1.
If the defined area specified by the parameter is not empty, or if there is an error in the parameter
specification, register processing is aborted.(The pre-registered and complete data is effective.)
The printer should be reset if logo registration is completed or register processing is aborted.
If an error occurs while performing register processing (the time from when the first parameter is OK
until the printer initialization is completed after registering a logo), error processing, mechanical op-
eration and status processing cannot be performed. Also, data must not be sent from the host during
that time.
This command is executed only for logo registration and does not accompany the printing operation.
Logos are printed using the ESC FS p (print NV logo) command.
The NV memory capacity is 4 Mbits (512 Kbytes 524,288 bytes).
However, 4 Kbytes (4,096 bytes) are kept as parameter information separate to the data so the data
region memory capacity is 520,192 Bytes.
Ex.: When the registered data size per each one is 6 Kbytes (6,144 bytes), it is possible to register
520,192/6144 = 84.
3-54
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
(Note) Registration data shared by all stations, and modes.
If this command is used frequently, there is the possibility of damaging the non-volatile
memory. Write to the non-volatile memory less than 10 times in one day.
Relationship of logo and registered data
xn = xn1 + xn2 x 256, yn = yn1 + yn2 x 256
{ (xn 1 + xn2 x 256) x 8 } dot
Data
MSB
d(n1)
d(n2)
d(11)
d(12)
d(21)
d(22)
(yn1 + yn2 x 256) bite
(yn1 + yn2 x 256) x 8 dot
LSB
d(x1)
d(x2)
d(xn)
3-55
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC FS p n m
[Name] Print logo
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC FS
1B 1C
27 28
p
70
n
n
n
m
m
m
Decimal
112
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ m ≤ 3, 48 ≤ m ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ m ≤ “3”)
Slip
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ m ≤ 3, 48 ≤ m ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ m ≤ “3”)
Validation
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ m ≤ 3, 48 ≤ m ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ m ≤ “3”)
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
-
-
-
Validation
Prints the logo of registration number n registered using the logo registration command ESC FS q
according to the print mode m.
n: Logo Specification
n
Function
1 to 255
Specified logo number
m: Print Mode
m
Logo Print Mode
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
Normal mode
Horizontal double size mode
Vertical double size mode
Double high/wide mode
• If the parameter is within the defined region, execute this command after printing the unprinted data
in the line buffer.
(Unprinted data is printed regardless of whether the specified logo was registered by n.) )
• It is not possible to print with other data in the same line (characters, bit images, bar codes).
• Form feed obeys the vertical print size of the logo.
• Print modes, excluding upside-down printing (enhanced, double, underline, character size, black/
white inverted, and 90˚ right rotation) are unaffected.
• If the logo horizontal print size exceeds the horizontal print region, the portion exceeding the area is
not printed.
• When page mode is selected, supports only vertical double high, and horizontal double wide
modes.
• Logos are printed according to the following command settings.
• Left margin (ESC I n)
• Right margin (ESC Q n)
• Position alignment (ESC GS a n)
• Absolute position movement (ESC GS A n1 n2)
• Relative position movement (ESC GS R n1 n2)
• Horizontal tab (HT)
• Upside-down printing (SI)
3-56
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC RS L m
[Name] Logo batch control
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC RS
L
1E 4C
30 76
m
m
m
1B
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ m ≤ 3, 48 ≤ m ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ m ≤ “3”), m = 255
0 ≤ m ≤ 3, 48 ≤ m ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ m ≤ “3”), m = 255
Validation
Thermal
Slip
0 ≤ m ≤ 3, 48 ≤ m ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ m ≤ “3”), m = 255
[Initial Value]
[Function]
-
-
-
Validation
Controls logos specified by the parameter m.
After execution, resets the printer.
m: Print Mode
m
Logo Control Mode
Normal mode batch printing
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
255
Horizontal double size mode batch printing
Vertical double size mode batch printing
Double high/wide mode batch printing
Logo batch delete
• If the parameter is within the defined region, execute this command after printing the unprinted data
in the line buffer.
(Unprinted data is printed regardless of whether the specified logo was registered by n.) )
• Form feed obeys the vertical print size of the logo.
• Print modes, excluding upside-down printing (enhanced, double, underline, character size, black/
white inverted, and 90˚ right rotation) are unaffected by logos.
• Prints logo number as shown below in the line above each logo print.
This line is printed with ANK characters, so currently set adornment is applied.
(Print Ex.) “LOGO No. 1” (Each logo number is printed at the “1” position.)
• If the logo horizontal print size exceeds the horizontal print region, the portion exceeding the area is
not printed.
• This test print is affected by the following command settings.
• Left margin (ESC I n)
• Right margin (ESC Q n)
• Position alignment (ESC GS a n)
• Print region setting (ESC RS A n)
• Upside-down printing (SI)
• After batch printing output is ended, paper is fed automatically to the cutting position, paper is cut (if
the printer is equipped with a cutter), and the printer is reset.
<Slip>, <Validation>
When page mode is selected, four bytes ignored.
3-57
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-10) Bar Codes
ESC b n1 n2 n3 n4 d1 . . . dk RS
[Name] Print bar code
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
b
n1 n2 n3 n4 d1
.. dk
.. dk
.. dk
RS
1E
30
1B 62 n1 n2 n3 n4 d1
27 98 n1 n2 n3 n4 d1
Decimal
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 8, 48 ≤ n1 ≤ 56 (“0” ≤ n1 ≤ “8”)
1 ≤ n2 ≤ 4, 49 ≤ n2 ≤ 52 (“1” ≤ n2 ≤ “4”)
1 ≤ n4 ≤ 255
n3 (bar code mode), d (bar code data),
Defined area of k (bar code data count) is different depending on the bar code type.
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
[Initial Value]
Thermal
Slip
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Bar code printing is executed according to the following parameters.
If n1, n2, n3 and n4 are acquired and detected to be out of the defined area, data up to RS is dis-
carded.
• n1: Bar Code Type Selection
n1
Bar Codes Types
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
4, 52
5, 53
6, 54
7, 55
8, 56
UPC-E
UPC-A
JAN/EAN8
JAN/EAN13
Code39
ITF
Code128
Code93
NW-7
• n2: Character Selection Under Bar Code, and Line Feed Addition Selection
n2
Under-bar character selection and added line feed selection
No added under-bar charactersExecutes a form feed after bar code is printed.
Added under-bar charactersExecutes a form feed after bar code is printed.
No added under-bar charactersDoes not execute a form feed after bar code is printed.
Added under-bar charactersDoes not execute a form feed after bar code is printed.
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
4, 52
3-58
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
• n3: Bar Code Mode Selection
n3
Bar Codes Types
Code39, NW-7
UPC-E, UPC-A, JAN/EAN8
ITF
JAN/EAN13, Code128, Code93
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
4, 52
5, 53
6, 54
7, 55
8, 56
9, 57
Minimum module 2 dots
Narrow : Wide = 2: 6 dots
Narrow : Wide = 3: 9 dots
Narrow : Wide = 4:12 dots
Narrow : Wide = 2: 5 dots
Narrow : Wide = 3: 8 dots
Narrow : Wide = 4:10 dots
Narrow : Wide = 2: 4 dots
Narrow : Wide = 3: 6 dots
Narrow : Wide = 4: 8 dots
Narrow : Wide = 2: 5 dots
Narrow : Wide = 4:10 dots
Narrow : Wide = 6:15 dots
Narrow : Wide = 2: 4 dots
Narrow : Wide = 4: 8 dots
Narrow : Wide = 6:12 dots
Narrow : Wide = 2: 6 dots
Narrow : Wide = 3: 9 dots
Narrow : Wide = 4:12 dots
Minimum module 3 dots
Minimum module 4 dots
---
---
---
---
---
---
• n4: Bar code height (dot count)
Spec. 1: When the height of the bar code is more than the form feed amount, the form feed amount
is automatically doubled.
Spec. 2: Line feed according to (bar code height + under-bar characters)
• k (bar code data count), d (bar code data)
Bar Codes Types
UPC-E
Defined area of k
11 ≤ k ≤ 12
11 ≤ k ≤ 12
7 ≤ k ≤ 8
Defined area of d
48 ≤ d ≤ 57 (“0” ≤ d ≤ “9”)
UPC-A
48 ≤ d ≤ 57 (“0” ≤ d ≤ “9”)
JAN/EAN8
JAN/EAN13
Code39
48 ≤ d ≤ 57 (“0” ≤ d ≤ “9”)
12 ≤ k ≤ 13
1 ≤ k
48 ≤ d ≤ 57 (“0” ≤ d ≤ “9”)
48 ≤ d ≤ 57 (“0” ≤ d ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ d ≤ 90 (“A” ≤ d ≤ “Z”)
32, 36, 37, 43, 45, 46, 47(SP, “$”, “%”, “+”, “-”, “.”, “/”)
ITF
1 ≤ k
48 ≤ d ≤ 57 (“0” ≤ d ≤ “9”)
For odd numbers
0 data is automatically added
to the top.
Code128
Code93
NW-7
1 ≤ k
1 ≤ k
1 ≤ k
0 ≤ d ≤ 127
0 ≤ d ≤ 127
48 ≤ d ≤ 57 (“0” ≤ d ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ d ≤ 68 (“A” ≤ d ≤ “D”)
36, 43, 45, 46, 47, 58 (“$”, “+”, “-”, “.”, “/”, “:”)
97, 98, 99, 100 (“a,” “b,” “c,” “d”)
• UPC-E: k = 11 (or 12)
The 12th check digit is automatically applied, so it is ignored even if specified.
Command is ignored if the data cannot be shortened. Data conversion to rectangles is automatic.
• UPC-A: k = 11 (or 12)
The 12th check digit is automatically applied, so it is ignored even if specified.
• JAN/EAN -8: k = 7 (or 8)
The 8th check digit is automatically applied, so it is ignored even if specified.
• JAN/EAN -13: k = 12 (or 13)
The 13th check digit cannot be automatically applied, so it is ignored even if specified.
• CODE39: k is freely set, and maximum value differs according to the mode.
Start and stop codes (*) are automatically included.
• ITF: k is freely set, and maximum value differs according to the mode.
If the data is an odd line, 0 data is automatically appended to the top.
• CODE128: k is freely set, and maximum value differs according to the mode and print character
type.
Check character is automatically appended.
• CODE93: k is freely set, and maximum value differs according to the mode and print character
type.
The start/stop code (□) is automatically appended.
• NW7: k is freely set, and maximum value differs according to the mode and print character type.
Both start/stop codes are included in the data (but not automatically applied).
3-59
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-11) Cutter Control
ESC d n
[Name] Auto-cutter:
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
d
n
n
n
64
27 100
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
0 ≤ d ≤ 3,
48 ≤ d ≤ 51 (“0” ≤ d ≤ “3”)
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Executes the auto-cutter.
After auto-cutter is executed, the printer considers that position to be the top of the page.
n
Auto-cutter
0, 48
Full cut at the current position.
Print data in line buffer is printed before a full cut.
Models not provided the auto-cutter execute only functions other than the cutting operation
(printing/paper feed operations).
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
Partial cut at the current position.
Print data in line buffer is printed before a partial cut.
Models not provided the auto-cutter execute only functions other than the cutting operation
(printing/paper feed operations).
Paper is fed to cutting position, then a full cut.
Print data in line buffer is printed before the operation described above.
Models not provided the auto-cutter execute only functions other than the cutting operation
(printing/paper feed operations).
Paper is fed to cutting position, then a partial cut.
Print data in line buffer is printed before the operation described above.
Models not provided the auto-cutter execute only functions other than the cutting operation
(printing/paper feed operations).
(*) The auto-cutter function operates in the following ways on models that only have a full cut or a
partial cut.
• Models that perform only a full cut.:
Executes a full cut when for instructions calling for a
partial cut.
• Models that perform only a partial cut.:
Executes a partial cut when for instructions calling
for a full cut.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Three bytes ignored
3-60
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-12) External Device Drive
ESC BEL n1 n2
[Name] Set external drive device 1 pulse width
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC BEL n1 n2
1B
27
07 n1 n2
n1 n2
7
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n1 ≤ 127, 1 ≤ n2 ≤ 127
1 ≤ n1 ≤ 127, 1 ≤ n2 ≤ 127
1 ≤ n1 ≤ 127, 1 ≤ n2 ≤ 127
n1 = 20 (Energizing time: 200 msec)
Validation
Thermal
[Initial Value]
n2 = 20 (Delay time: 200 msec)
Slip
:
:
n1 = 20 (Energizing time: 200 msec)
n2 = 20 (Delay time: 200 msec)
Validation
n1 = 20 (Energizing time: 200 msec)
n2 = 20 (Delay time: 200 msec)
[Function]
Sets the energizing and delay times for drive of the external device.
• Energizing time = 10 x n1 (ms)
• Delay time = 10 x n2 (ms)
ON
Drive Pulse
OFF
× n1(msec)
10 × n2(msec)
(Delay Time)
10
(Energizing Time)
Print Operation
Printing and Paper Feed Prohibited
After printing, this is executed by BEL (External device 1 drive instruction) or FS (External device 1
drive instruction).
Handled in the following way when n1 and n2 are out of range.
• When n1 = 0, or n2 = 0, this command is ignored.
• When n1 > 127 is specified, n1 = 127; when n2 > 127 is specified, n2 = 127.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-61
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
BEL
[Name] External device 1 drive instruction
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
BEL
07
7
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
:
:
:
:
:
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Executes the external device drive conditions set according to the command to set the external drive
device pulse width (ESC BEL n1 n2).
As with other commands, it temporarily stores data in the data buffer, then executes in the order re-
ceived.
(Note) External device 1 and external device 2 cannot be executed simultaneously.
FS
[Name] External device 1 drive instruction
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal 1C
Decimal 28
FS
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Slip
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Executes the external device drive conditions set according to the command to set the external drive
device pulse width (ESC BEL n1 n2).
As with other commands, it temporarily stores data in the data buffer, then executes in the order re-
ceived.
(Note) External device 1 and external device 2 cannot be executed simultaneously.
3-62
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
SUB
[Name] External device 2 drive instruction
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
SUB
1A
26
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Drives external device 2. The energizing time and delay time for the external device 2 are fixed at
200 ms each.
As with other commands, it temporarily stores data in the data buffer, then executes in the order
received.
(Note) External device 1 and external device 2 cannot be executed simultaneously.
EM
[Name] External device 2 drive instruction
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
EM
19
25
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Drives external device 2.The energizing time and delay time for the external device 2 are fixed at
200 ms each.
As with other commands, it temporarily stores data in the data buffer, then executes in the order
received.
(Note) External device 1 and external device 2 cannot be executed simultaneously.
3-63
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS BEL m t1 t2
[Name] Ring buzzer
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
GS
1D
29
BEL
07
7
m
m
m
t1
t1
t1
t2
t2
t2
1B
27
Decimal
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
1 ≤ m ≤ 2, 49 ≤ m ≤ 50 (“1” ≤ m ≤ “2”)
1 ≤ t1 ≤ 255, 1 ≤ t2 ≤ 255
Slip
1 ≤ m ≤ 2, 49 ≤ m ≤ 50 (“1” ≤ m ≤ “2”)
1 ≤ t1 ≤ 255, 1 ≤ t2 ≤ 255
Validation
1 ≤ m ≤ 2, 49 ≤ m ≤ 50 (“1” ≤ m ≤ “2”)
1 ≤ t1 ≤ 255, 1 ≤ t2 ≤ 255
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
-
-
-
Validation
Rings buzzer.
m specifies the buzzer drive terminal.
m
Buzzer Drive Terminals
Buzzer drive terminal 1
Buzzer drive terminal 2
1, 49
2, 50
t1 specifies the energizing time; t2 specifies the delay time.
• Energizing time = 20 msec x t1
• Delay time
= 20 msec x t2
Buzzer cannot ring whle printer is printing.
This command is prohibited for use for anything other than ringing the buzzer.
(When this command is used for the drawer drive on models equipped with an external device
terminal, it will be damaged, so care is needed.) )
ON
Drive Pulse
OFF
20 × t1 (msec)
20 × t2 (msec)
(Delay Time)
(Energizing Time
Print Operation
Printing and Paper Feed Prohibited
3-64
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS EM DC1 m n1 n2
[Name] Set external buzzer drive pulse condition
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
29
EM DC1
m
m
m
n1 n2
n1 n2
n1 n2
19
25
11
17
Decimal
27
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
1 ≤ m ≤ 2, 49 ≤ m ≤ 50, (“1” ≤ m ≤ “2”)
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255
Slip
1 ≤ m ≤ 2, 49 ≤ m ≤ 50, (“1” ≤ m ≤ “2”)
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255
Validation
1 ≤ m ≤ 2, 49 ≤ m ≤ 50, (“1” ≤ m ≤ “2”)
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255
n1 = 0, n2 = 0
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
n1 = 0, n2 = 0
Validation
n1 = 0, n2 = 0
Set external buzzer drive pulse condition.
m specifies the buzzer drive terminal that sets the condition.
m
Buzzer Drive Terminals
Buzzer drive terminal 1
Buzzer drive terminal 2
1, 49
2, 50
n1 specifies the energizing time; n2 specifies the delay time.
• Energizing time = 20 msec x n1
• Delay time = 20 msec x n2
ON
Drive Pulse
OFF
20 × n1(msec)
20 × n2(msec)
(Delay Time)
(Energizing Time)
Print Operation
Printing and Paper Feed Prohibited
The drive of the external buzzer set by this command is performed by ESC GS EM DC2 m n1 n2.
The set value is not initialized by ESC @, or CAN.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-65
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS EM DC2 m n1 n2
[Name] Execute external buzzer drive
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS EM
DC2
12
m
m
m
n1 n2
n1 n2
n1 n2
1D
29
19
25
27
18
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
1 ≤ m ≤ 2, 49 ≤ m ≤ 50, (“1” ≤ m ≤ “2”)
1 ≤ n1 ≤ 20, n2 = 0
Slip
1 ≤ m ≤ 2, 49 ≤ m ≤ 50, (“1” ≤ m ≤ “2”)
1 ≤ n1 ≤ 20, n2 = 0
Validation
1 ≤ m ≤ 2, 49 ≤ m ≤ 50, (“1” ≤ m ≤ “2”)
1 ≤ n1 ≤ 20, n2 = 0
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
-
-
-
Validation
Repeatedly drives the buzzer according to the ON/OFF conditions set by the external buzzer drive
pulse condition command ESC GS EM DC1 m t1 t2.
m specifies the buzzer drive terminal to drive.
Buzzer Drive Terminals
m
1, 49
2, 50
Buzzer drive terminal 1
Buzzer drive terminal 2
Specifies the number of times to repeat buzzer drive with (n2 x 256 + n1).
Buzzer cannot ring while printer is printing.
This command is prohibited for use for anything other than ringing the buzzer.
(When this command is used for the drawer drive on models equipped with an external device
terminal, it will be damaged, so it is absolutely prohibited.) )
The buzzer can be stopped by pressing the FEED switch or the RELEASE switch while the buzzer is
ringing, or opening the receipt cover or the slip cover.
[Ex.:]
n1 = 8
ON
OFF
Drive Pulse
ON OFF
Printing/Paper Feed Prohibited
Print Operation
(Note) If the off time is set to 0 (zero), it is possible to ring the buzzer
continuously for the amount of n1. For example, if on = 5 seconds, off = 0,
and n1 = 20 times, the buzzer will ring for 100 seconds.
3-66
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-13) Print Settings
ESC RS d n
[Name] Set print density
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
RS
1E
30
d
64
n
n
n
27
100
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 15
48 ≤ n ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n ≤ “F”)
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Memory switch setting
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets print density.
This command stops printing to be executed.
n
Print Density
Print density 1.3
Print density 1.2
Print density 1.1
Print density 1.0
Print density 0.9
Print density 0.8
Print density 0.7
(Reserved)
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
4, 52
5, 53
6, 54
7, 55
8, 56
9, 57
10, 65
11, 66
12, 67
13, 68
14, 69
15, 70
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-67
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC RS r n
[Name] Set printing speed
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
RS
1E
30
r
72
n
n
n
1B
27
114
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 2
48 ≤ n ≤ 50 (“0” ≤ n ≤ “2”)
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Memory switch setting
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets print speed.
This command stops printing to be executed.
n
Print Speed
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
High speed
Mid-speed
Slow speed
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-68
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-14) Status
ESC RS a n
[Name] Set status transmission conditions
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
RS
a
n
n
n
1E 61
30 97
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 3, 48 ≤ n ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “51”)
0 ≤ n ≤ 3, 48 ≤ n ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “51”)
0 ≤ n ≤ 3, 48 ≤ n ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “51”)
DIPS switches/Memory switch setting
DIPS switches/Memory switch setting
DIPS switches/Memory switch setting
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Sets the status transmission conditions. See Appendix 2 for details regarding ASB status.
This command is effective only on printers that have an interface capable of bi-directional data
communications.
When using serial, parallel or USB (vendor class), use is possible.
The command is ignored (set to enable auto-status) when using Ethernet or wireless LAN.
Settings of this command are unaffected by the ESC @ (command initialization) command.
See each printer’s product specifications manual for details on the memory switch settings.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-69
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC ACK SOH
[Name] Real-time printer status (ASB Status)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC ACK SOH
1B
27
06
6
01
1
Decimal
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Slip
Validation
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
Validation
This command is effective only when using an interface capable of bi-directional data
communications.
When this command is received, the printer sends the status to the host in real time.
Immediately executed not when taking out from the reception buffer, but when received from the
host.)
Bi-directional parallel interfaces enter a “data present” state.
See the Appendix Auto Status for details regarding status.
When in the serial interface DTR mode, and using a parallel interface, set so that the status can be
inquired even when offline for errors, etc.
This command is not used when auto-status is valid.
When this command is sent once to the printer, do not send the next ESC ACK SOH command until
the final auto status has been received.
See Appendix 2 Automatic Status for details regarding ASB status.
ENQ
[Name] Real-time printer status (1)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ENQ
05
5
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
This command is effective only when using an interface capable of bi-directional data
communications.
When this command is received, the printer sends one byte of ENQ status to the host in real time.
Immediately executed not when taking out from the reception buffer, but when received from the
host.)
Bi-directional parallel interfaces enter a “data present” state.
See Appendix ENQ Command Status for details regarding status.
When this command is sent once to the printer, do not send the next ENQ command until the ENQ
status has been received.
This command is not used when auto-status is valid.
See Appendix 2 ENQ Command Status for details regarding status.
3-70
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
EOT
[Name] Real-time printer status (2)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
EOT
04
4
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
This command is effective only when using an interface capable of bi-directional data
communications.
When this command is received, the printer sends one byte of EOT status to the host in real time.
Immediately executed not when taking out from the reception buffer, but when received from the
host.)
Bi-directional parallel interfaces enter a “data present” state.
See Appendix EOT Command Status for details regarding status.
When this command is sent once to the printer, do not send the next EOT command until the EOT
status has been received.
This command is not used when auto-status is valid.
See Appendix 2 EOT Command Status for details regarding status.
ETB
[Name] Update of ETB status of ASB
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ETB
17
23
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
This command is effective only when using an interface capable of bi-directional data
communications.
This command waits until all printing is completed (the print motor is stopped), and after printing is
completed, the auto status printer status 1-1 (ETB command) becomes 1 (ETB execution complet-
ed), and the ETB counter is updated (incremented).
Note that when executing this command, and print data remains the line buffer, this command is ex-
ecuted after printing the remaining data.
The hose checks that this bit has changed to “1” thereby making it possible to ascertain that the
printing of the sent data is completed.
This ETB status bit is cleared to “0” when returned to host.
Also, ETB is appended to the end of 1 data block and several blocks are sent at once. By getting the
ETB counter sequentially, it is possible to confirm the end of printing the several blocks.
Note that the ETB counter is cleared to zero by the ESC RS E command.
The following shows the details of the processing in the printer with this command.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Reads out the ETB command from the reception buffer.
Waits for the printing of data to be completed before the ETB command
After checking the end of printing, the auto status ETB status is set, and the ETB counter is
incremented.
(4)
Auto status transmission (only when auto status is valid)
See Appendix 2 for details regarding the ASB status.
3-71
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC RS E n
[Name] Initialize ASB ETB counter, and ETB status.
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
RS
E
n
n
n
1E 45
30 69
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
n = 0, 48 (“0”)
n = 0, 48 (“0”)
n = 0, 48 (“0”)
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
ASB ETB counter = 0
ASB ETB counter = 0
ASB ETB counter = 0
Validation
Clears the ASB ETB counter to zero and clears the ETB status.
However, when clearing the ETB counter to zero using this command, ASB status is not transmitted.
The ETB counter and ETB status are initialized by the following command in addition to this com-
mand.
• Cancel print data and initialize commands <CAN>
3-72
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-15) Kanji Characters
ESC p
[Name] Specify JIS Kanji character mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
p
70
27
112
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
-
-
-
:
:
:
:
:
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Cancel JIS Kanji character mode
Cancel JIS Kanji character mode
Cancel JIS Kanji character mode
Validation
Specifies JIS Kanji character mode
When in JIS Kanji character mode, all character codes are handled as 2 byte Japanese characters
(First byte: upper code; second byte: lower code).
Even when setting the JIS Kanji mode, the control code is valid.
This command is ignored for models not equipped with Japanese and Kanji characters and when
the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single byte countries) by the memory
switch.
<Slip>, <Validation>
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
(Note) The settings by this command are valid for all stations.
ESC q
[Name] Cancel JIS Kanji character mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
q
71
27
113
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Cancel JIS Kanji character mode
Cancel JIS Kanji character mode
Cancel JIS Kanji character mode
Validation
Cancels JIS Kanji character mode.
This command is ignored for models not equipped with Japanese and Kanji characters and when
the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single byte countries) by the memory
switch.
<Slip>, <Validation>
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
(Note) The settings by this command are valid for all stations.
3-73
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC $ n
[Name] Specify/cancel JIS Kanji character mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
$
n
n
n
1B 24
27 36
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
Validation
Thermal
Slip
n = 0, 1, 48, 49
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Memory switch setting
Memory switch setting
Memory switch setting
Validation
Specifies and cancels the shift JIS Kanji character mode.
n
Shift JIS Japanese Character Mode
Cancel shift JIS Kanji character mode
0, 48
1, 49
Specify shift JIS Kanji character mode
When in shift JIS Kanji character mode, if the data is <80>H to <9F>H or <E0>H to <FF>H, this is
handled as 2 byte Japanese characters (First byte: upper code; second byte: lower code).
Even when setting the shift JIS Kanji character mode, the control code is valid.
When the shift JIS Kanji character mode is canceled, the block graphics mode is selected. At that
time, if the data is <80>H to <9F>H or <E0>H to <FF>H, this is handled as 1 byte of block graphic
characters.
This command is ignored for models not equipped with Japanese and Kanji characters and when
the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single byte countries) by the memory
switch.
See each printer’s product specifications manual for details on the memory switch settings.
When the lower code is <7F>, <FD> to <FF>h, two bytes are ignored.
<Slip>, <Validation>
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
(Note) The settings by this command are valid for all stations.
3-74
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC s n1 n2
[Name] Set two-byte Kanji characters left/right spaces
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
s
n1 n2
73 n1 n2
115 n1 n2
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 7, 48 ≤ n1 ≤ 55 (“0” ≤ n1 ≤ “7”)
0 ≤ n2 ≤ 15, 48 ≤ n2 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n2 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n2 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n2 ≤ “F”)
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 7, 48 ≤ n1 ≤ 55 (“0” ≤ n1 ≤ “7”)
0 ≤ n2 ≤ 15, 48 ≤ n2 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n2 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n2 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n2 ≤ “F”)
Validation
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 7, 48 ≤ n1 ≤ 55 (“0” ≤ n1 ≤ “7”)
0 ≤ n2 ≤ 15, 48 ≤ n2 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n2 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n2 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n2 ≤ “F”)
Memory switch setting
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
Memory switch setting
Validation
Memory switch setting
Adds n1 dot left space and n2 dot right space to Kanji characters.
This command is ignored for models not equipped with Chinese fonts (for overseas) and when the
specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single byte countries) by the memory
switch.
See each printer’s product specifications manual for details on the memory switch settings.
<Slip>, <Validation>
The values of n1 and n2 when using two-byte 8 x 16, two-byte 16 x 16 and double-tall 8 x 16 charac-
ters correspond to the n1 and n2 values for double high/double wide 16 x 16 characters.
If the Japanese character size including the right and left spaces (n1 + character width + n2) ex-
ceeds the print region, printing will not be possible and a question mark (“?”) will be printed instead.
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
(Note) The settings by this command are valid for all stations.
3-75
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC t n1 n2
[Name] Set single-byte Kanji characters left/right spaces
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
t
n1 n2
74 n1 n2
116 n1 n2
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 7, 48 ≤ n1 ≤ 55 (“0” ≤ n1 ≤ “7”)
0 ≤ n2 ≤ 15, 48 ≤ n2 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n2 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n2 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n2 ≤ “F”)
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 7, 48 ≤ n1 ≤ 55 (“0” ≤ n1 ≤ “7”)
0 ≤ n2 ≤ 15, 48 ≤ n2 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n2 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n2 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n2 ≤ “F”)
Validation
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 7, 48 ≤ n1 ≤ 55 (“0” ≤ n1 ≤ “7”)
0 ≤ n2 ≤ 15, 48 ≤ n2 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n2 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n2 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n2 ≤ “F”)
Memory switch setting
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
Memory switch setting
Validation
Memory switch setting
Adds n1 dot left space and n2 dot right space to single-byte Kanji characters.
See each printer’s product specifications manual for details on the memory switch settings.
This command is ignored for models not equipped with Japanese and Kanji characters and when
the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single byte countries) by the memory
switch.
<Slip>, <Validation>
The values of n1 and n2 when using two-byte 8 x 16, two-byte 16 x 16 and double-tall 8 x 16 charac-
ters correspond to the n1 and n2 values for double high/double wide 16 x 16 characters.
If the Japanese character size including the right and left spaces (n1 + character width + n2) ex-
ceeds the print region, printing will not be possible and a question mark (“?”) will be printed instead.
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
(Note) The settings by this command are valid for all stations.
3-76
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC r c1 c2 d1 … dk
[Name] Register Chinese download characters
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
r
c1 c2 d1
.. dk
.. dk
.. dk
72 c1 c2 d1
114 c1 c2 d1
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = 72, c1 and c2 differ according to specifications and code type (see table below).
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = 32, c1 and c2 differ according to specifications and code type (see table below).
Validation
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = 32, c1 and c2 differ according to specifications and code type (see table below).
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
All spaces
All spaces
All spaces
Validation
Registers Chinese download characters to c1 and c2 addresses. Those already registered to these
addresses are overwritten.
If c1 and c2 are outside of the defined are or the printer is model not equipped with Chinese fonts
(for overseas) and when the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single byte
countries) by the memory switch, the printer discards up to d1 and dk.
Chinese download characters once defined are valid until redefined or the power is turned OFF.
Defined Chinese download characters are accessed with two-bytes, in the same way as other Kanji
characters. At that time, c1 is the first byte, c2 is the second byte.d1, d2 • • • d32 are character data.
<Thermal>
The defined ranges are shown below. (* The registration region is the same for Japanese characters
in JIS or shift JIS.)
Specifications
c1
c2
Registration count
94 Characters
Japanese characters/JIS type
c1 = 77h
c1 = ECh
21h ≤ c2 ≤ 7Eh
40h ≤ c2 ≤ 7Eh
Japanese characters/Shift JIS type
94 Characters
80h ≤ c2 ≤ 9Eh
They are designed as shown below and data is sent sequentially.
Horizontal 24 dot
d1
d4
d7
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
d2
d5
d8
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
d3
d6
d9
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
d10 ●
d13 ●
d16 ●
d19 ●
d22 ●
d25 ●
d28 ●
d31 ●
d34 ●
d37 ●
d40 ●
d43 ●
d46 ●
d49 ●
d52 ●
d55 ●
d58 ●
d61 ●
d64 ●
d67 ●
d70 ●
d11 ●
d14 ●
d17 ●
d20 ●
d23 ●
d26 ●
d29 ●
d32 ●
d35 ●
d38 ●
d41 ●
d44 ●
d47 ●
d50 ●
d53 ●
d56 ●
d59 ●
d62 ●
d65 ●
d68 ●
d71 ●
d12 ●
d15 ●
d18 ●
d21 ●
d24 ●
d27 ●
d30 ●
d33 ●
d36 ●
d39 ●
d42 ●
d45 ●
d48 ●
d51 ●
d54 ●
d57 ●
d60 ●
d63 ●
d66 ●
d69 ●
d72 ●
Vertical 24 dot
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
: Font Data /
: Invalid Data
3-77
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
<Slip>, <Validation>
The defined ranges are shown below.
Specifications
c1
c2
Registration count
94 Characters
Japanese Language Kanji characters
c1 = 77h
21h ≤ c2 ≤ 7Eh
They are designed as shown below and data is sent sequentially.
Horizontal 16 dot
d1 d3 d5 d7 d9 d11 d13 d15 d17 d19 d21 d23 d25 d27 d29 d31
MSB
LSB
Vertical
16 dot
d2 d4 d6 d8 d10 d12 d14 d16 d18 d20 d22 d24 d26 d28 d30 d32
MSB
LSB
The font of Kanji download characters is composed of 16 x 16 dot patterns.
Bits that correspond to the dots to print are “1,” and the bits that correspond to the dots that are not printed are “0.”
When page mode is selected, only registration is possible.
Printing is possible after switching to line mode.
Registered data is shared by slip and validation.
3-78
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC u n
[Name] Specify two-byte 16 x 16 dot Kanji character (Single density/double density)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
u
75
n
n
n
27
117
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
Slip
n = 0, 1, n = 48, 49 (“0,” “1”)
Validation
Thermal
Slip
n = 0, 1, n = 48, 49 (“0,” “1”)
[Initial Value]
-
Specify two-byte 16 x 16 dot Kanji characters (single density).
Specify two-byte 16 x 16 dot Kanji characters (single density).
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to slip or validation.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Specifies two-byte 16 x 16 dot Kanji character (Single density/double density) (* : See “Relationship
of Japanese Character Size Selection.”
n
State Transition
0, 48
Specify two-byte 16 x 16 dot [double density] Japanese characters
When two-bytes is selected, they become four-pass characters (state (A) to state (B))
Dots continuous horizontally are printing.
Sets to the 4 x expanded character mode by combining with ESC x 0 (Specify expanded
Japanese characters) (state (A) → state (D))
1, 49
Specify two-byte 16 x 16 dot Kanji characters (single density).
When two-bytes is selected, they become two-pass characters (state (B) to state (A))
Dots continuous horizontally are thinned for printing.
Sets to the vertical expanded character mode by combining with ESC x 0 (Specify expanded
Kanji characters) (state (B) → state (C))
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
3-79
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC x n
[Name] Specify expanded Kanji characters (Double tall/double high & wide)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
x
78
n
n
n
27
120
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
Slip
n = 0, 1, n = 48, 49 (“0,” “1”)
Validation
Thermal
Slip
n = 0, 1, n = 48, 49 (“0,” “1”)
[Initial Value]
-
Specify two-byte 16 x 16 dot Kanji characters (single density).
Specify two-byte 16 x 16 dot Kanji characters (single density).
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to slip or validation.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Sets (double tall/double high and wide) Kanji character expansion. (* : See “Relationship of
Japanese Character Size Selection.”
n
State Transition
0, 48
Sets Kanji character expansion.
When 16 x 16 dot Kanji characters [single density] are selected, they expand only in the
vertical direction.
[Vertical tall size: State (A) to state (C)]
When 16 x 16 dot Kanji characters [double density] are selected, they expand both vertically
and horizontally.
[Double high and wide size: State (B) to state (D)]
1, 49
Cancels specify Kanji character expansion, and sets to two-byte Kanji characters
When 16 x 16 dot Kanji characters [double density] are selected, they become two-pass
characters (state (C) to state (A))
When 16 x 16 dot Kanji characters [double density] are selected, they become four-pass
characters (state (D) to state (B))
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
3-80
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC w n
[Name] Specify expanded Kanji characters (batch double tall/double high & wide)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
w
77
n
n
n
27
119
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
Slip
n = 0, 1, n = 48, 49 (“0,” “1”)
Validation
Thermal
Slip
n = 0, 1, n = 48, 49 (“0,” “1”)
[Initial Value]
-
Specify two-byte 16 x 16 dot Kanji characters (single density).
Specify two-byte 16 x 16 dot Kanji characters (single density).
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to slip or validation.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Sets (batch double tall/double high and wide) Kanji character expansion. (* : See “Relationship of
Japanese Character Size Selection.”
n
State Transition
0, 48
Sets double high & wide (double-wide/double-high) 16 x 16 Japanese characters. (to state
(D))
1, 49
Cancels specify Japanese character expansion, and sets to two-byte 16 x 16 dot Japanese
characters [single density]
Japanese characters become two-pass characters ( to state (A))
When page mode is selected, only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to line mode.
<Relationship of Kanji character Size Selection>
Status (A)
Status (C)
ESC x 0
ESC x 1
Two-byte 16 x 16 Dot Kanji
(Single Density) (2-pass Printing)
Double High Kanji
(Double High Size) (2-pass Printing)
ESC w 0
ESC u 0
ESC u 1
ESC u 0
ESC u 1
ESC w 1
Status (B)
ESC x 0
ESC x 1
Status (D)
Two-byte 16 x 16 Dot Kanji
Double High/Double Wide Kanji
(Double Density) (4-pass Printing)
(Double High/Wide) (2-pass Printing)
See 5. Appendix 5-2 Expansion Position for details on the differences of dot configurations of [sin-
gle density] and [double density] in two-byte 16 x 16 dot Japanese characters. This section use a
Japanese character to illustrate the difference.
3-81
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-3-16) Others
RS
[Name] Ring buzzer
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
RS
1E
30
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
Issues a short buzzer sound from the printer.
Execute this command after printing the unprinted data in the line buffer.
CAN
[Name] Cancel print data and initialize commands
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
CAN
18
24
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Slip
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
When the reception buffer and line buffer are cleared, the set commands are initialized.
Immediately executed not when taking out from the reception buffer, but when received from the
host.
DIPSW re-loading is not performed.
After execution, thermal is selected.
The following shows the specifications that are not initialized by this command.
• Set print density
• Set print speed
• Two Color Printing Mode Setting
• Printing color in 2-color printing mode
• External device drive condition
• Auto status valid/invalid conditions
3-82
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC @
[Name] Command initialization
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
@
1B 40
27 64
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Initializes each command after printing data in the line buffer.
However, printers with memory switch settings are initialized to the memory switch settings.
DIPSW re-loading is not performed.
After execution, thermal is selected.
<Shared>
• ANK characters, Kanji character adornment, expansion
• Kanji character mode
• ANK right space
• Kanji character right and left spaces
• Character pitch
• International characters
• Code pages
• Set slash zero
• Set specify/cancel external character (external register character data is retained)
• Line feed amount
• Set upside-down, position alignment
• Right/left margins
• Horizontal tab
<Thermal>
• Page length
• Current position (move to top of page, top of line)
• Vertical tab
<Slip>, <Validation>
• Paper discharge
<Other Information>
The following shows the specifications that are not initialized by this command.
• Set print density
• Set print speed
• Two Color Printing Mode Setting
• Printing color in 2-color printing mode
• External device drive condition
• Auto status valid/invalid conditions
3-83
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC U n
[Name] Select printing direction
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
U
n
n
n
1B 55
27 85
Decimal
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
Slip
0 ≤ n ≤ 2, 48 ≤ n ≤ 50, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “2”)
Validation
0 ≤ n ≤ 2, 48 ≤ n ≤ 50, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “2”)
[Initial Value]
Thermal
Slip
-
n = 0
n = 0
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to slip or validation.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Executes print direction specified by this command after printing data in the line buffer.
n
State Transition
0, 48
1, 49
Specify bi-directional printing
Specify uni-directional printing
Bi-directional printing is faster than uni-directional printing.
With uni-directional printing, printing is performed only when the print head moves from left to right.
The printing direction can be set independently for both line mode and page mode.
Setting values are shared for slip, and validation line mode and page mode is selected.
3-84
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS # m N n1 n2 n3 n4 LF NUL
[Name] Set memory switch
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
27
GS
1D 23
29 35
#
m
m
m
N
N
N
n1 n2 n3 n4 LF
n1 n2 n3 n4 0A
n1 n2 n3 n4 10
NUL
00
0
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
m = 87, 84, 44, 43, 45, 64, 75, 76 (m = “W”, “T”, “,”, “+”, “-”, “@”, “K”, “L”)
48 ≤ n1 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n1 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n1 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n1 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n1 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ n2 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n2 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n2 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n2 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n2 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ n3 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n3 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n3 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n3 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n3 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ n4 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n4 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n4 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n4 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n4 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ N ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ N ≤ 72 (”A” ≤ N ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ N ≤ 104 (“a” ≤ N ≤ “h”)
N = 85 (U) User defined region
Slip
m = 87, 84, 44, 43, 45, 64, 75, 76 (m = “W”, “T”, “,”, “+”, “-”, “@”, “K”, “L”)
48 ≤ n1 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n1 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n1 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n1 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n1 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ n2 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n2 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n2 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n2 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n2 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ n3 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n3 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n3 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n3 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n3 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ n4 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n4 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n4 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n4 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n4 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ N ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ N ≤ 72 (”A” ≤ N ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ N ≤ 104 (“a” ≤ N ≤ “h”)
N = 85 (U) User defined region
Validation
m = 87, 84, 44, 43, 45, 64, 75, 76 (m = “W”, “T”, “,”, “+”, “-”, “@”, “K”, “L”)
48 ≤ n1 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n1 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n1 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n1 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n1 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ n2 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n2 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n2 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n2 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n2 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ n3 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n3 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n3 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n3 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n3 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ n4 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n4 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n4 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n4 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n4 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ N ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ N ≤ 72 (”A” ≤ N ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ N ≤ 104 (“a” ≤ N ≤ “h”)
N = 85 (U) User defined region
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
-
Sends command to write after defining memory switch using the definition command specified by the
following classes.
Memory switch information defined by the command to write is written to the volatile memory.
When writing to the volatile memory by the command to write, the printer executes a reset.
By specifying N = 85 (“U”), it is possible to register any 16 bit data.
Function
Class
m
N
n1 n2 n3 n4
Definition data write and reset
Write
“W”
“T”
“, ”
“+ ”
“-”
Fixed at “0”
Fixed at “0000”
Fixed at “0000”
n1 n2 n3 n4
Definition data write and reset and test print
Data Definition (Data Specification)
Write
Fixed at “0”
Definition
Definition
Definition
Definition
N
Data definition (set specified bit)
N
n1 n2 n3 n4
Data definition (clear specified bit)
N
n1 n2 n3 n4
Data Definition (initialize all data)
“@”
Fixed at “0”
Fixed at “0000”
Definition data write, reset, test print, and dot adjustment
Definition data write, dot adjustment, test print, and reset
• m
• N
: Mode Selection
: Memory switch number to specify
• n1 n2 n3 n4 : Specified data m = “+” → Specified Data
m = “+” → Bit number to set
m = “+” → Bit number to clear
<Thermal>
When a function was specified that accompanies position adjustment (m = “K,” “L”), this executes
only defined data write & reset, but does not execute the position adjustment.
<Validation>
When a function was specified that accompanies a self-print, and position adjustment
(m = “T,” “K,” “L”), this executes only defined data write & reset, but does not execute the self-print
or position adjustment.
3-85
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC # @ LF NUL
[Name] Initialize all memory switches
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
#
@
LF
NUL
00
0
1B 23 40 0A
27 35 64 10
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Initializes all memory switches
Valid when power turned on again, or a reset is applied
ESC # N ? n1 n2 n3 n4 LF NUL
[Name] Enquire memory switch settings
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
#
N
N
N
?
n1 n2 n3 n4 LF
3F n1 n2 n3 n4 0A 00
63 n1 n2 n3 n4 10
1B 23
27 35
0
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
n1 = 48 (“0”), n2 = 48 (“0”), n3 = 48 (“0”), n4 = 48 (“0”)
48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ N ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ N ≤ 72 (”A” ≤ N ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ N ≤ 104 (“a” ≤ N ≤ “h”)
N = 85 (U) User defined region
Slip
n1 = 48 (“0”), n2 = 48 (“0”), n3 = 48 (“0”), n4 = 48 (“0”)
48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ N ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ N ≤ 72 (”A” ≤ N ≤ “H”), 97 ≤ N ≤ 104 (“a” ≤ N ≤ “h”)
N = 85 (U) User defined region
Validation
n1 = 48 (“0”), n2 = 48 (“0”), n3 = 48 (“0”), n4 = 48 (“0”)
48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ N ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ N ≤ 72 (”A” ≤ N ≤ “H”), 97 ≤ N ≤ 104 (“a” ≤ N ≤ “h”)
N = 85 (U) User defined region
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
-
-
-
Validation
Sends the memory switch settings.
By specifying N = 85 (“U”), it is possible to read out any user-registered 16 bit data.
• N:
Memory Switch Number
Transmission Format
ESC # N ? d1 d2 d3 d4 LF NUL
• N:
Memory number
Memory switch settings
• d1, d2, d3, d4:
3-86
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC # * LF NUL
[Name] Inquire printer version
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
#
*
LF
NUL
00
0
1B 23 2A 0A
27 35 42 10
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Sends printer version.
ESC # *, printer version LF NUL
< Ex: For HSP7000 Ver. 1.0 ESC # *, HSP7000 Ver. 1.0 LF NUL >
ESC ? LF NUL
[Name] Reset printer (execute self print)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
?
LF NUL
1B 3F 0A
27 63 10
00
0
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Hardware resets the printer and executes on self print.
After sending this command, the next data is not sent until the printer is online (in a state wherein it
can receive data).
When resetting the printer, the following processes are performed.
I/F
Parallel
Mode
Process
---
BUSY output
DTR mark output
Xoff output
RS-232C
DTR mode
Xon/Xoff Mode
<Validation>
Executes only a reset; does not execute a self-print.
3-87
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
DC3
[Name] Printer deselect
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
DC3
13
19
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
Slip
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Select printer
Select printer
Select printer
Validation
[Function]
Deselects printer.
All received data is discarded until the next DC1 (printer select) is received.
DC1
[Name] Select printer
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
DC1
11
Decimal
17
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
Slip
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Select printer
Select printer
Select printer
Validation
This cancels the deselect state of the DC3 (printer deselect) and selects the printer.
3-88
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-4) Raster Graphics Command Details
Raster graphics are command types and incidental specifications that enable high speed and high quality printing of
graphics.
The following shows the characteristics and specifications for raster graphics.
•
•
Define the raster mode command as an expansion set for Star Line mode.
Basically no restrictions set for use of conventional STAR line mode.
Not usable with Star Page mode.
Supports high-speed data transmission
When using IEEE 1284, data transmission rate of 80 to 100 kbytes ensured.
Supports both fixed lengths and variable length modes.
Print speed selectable
Post printing cut operation selectable
All settings possible by raster commands.
•
•
•
•
Most settings are possible without DIPSW/memory switch settings.
Support of printer driver that supports the raster mode.
•
The following shows the raster command details.
Note that if not specifically noted, the following commands are effective only in raster mode and the commands are
ignored (Four bytes ignored) when other than the raster mode.
The raster image buffer in the command details described below indicate the raster dedicated image buffer, the length
thereof (vertical direction dot count) differing between models.
The following commands are valid only when thermal has been selected. Their use is prohibited when slip and valida-
tion have been selected.
The following commands are valid only when Thermal is selected. Use is prohibited when Slip/Validation is selected.
3-89
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * r R
[Name] Initialize raster mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B 2A
27 42 114 82
*
r
R
72 52
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Initializes raster mode.
This command is also valid when not in the raster mode.
However, initialization of the raster mode with this command is executed when entering the raster
mode.
The following settings are initialized using this command.
• Raster page length setting (ESC * r P n NUL)
• Raster print quality setting (ESC * Q n NUL)
• Raster print quality setting (ESC * r K n NUL)
• Raster left margin setting (ESC * r m l n NUL)
• Raster right margin setting (ESC * r m r n NUL)
• Raster EOT mode setting (ESC FF EOT)
• Raster FF mode setting (ESC FF NUL)
• Clear raster image buffer
Note that when entering the raster mode, it executes the same process as initialization of the raster
mode using this command.
However, because initialization is not performed when entering the raster mode only for the following
settings, when initializing the following it sends this initialization command.
• Raster print quality setting (ESC * r K n NUL)
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-90
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * r A
[Name] Enter raster mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
*
r
A
1B 2A
72 41
27 42 114 65
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Enters raster mode.
This command is ignored when in the raster mode.
The following shows the details regard processing of this command.
(1)
(2)
Reception of this command.
All data remaining in the reception buffer and image buffer is printed equivalent to the FF
command.
(3)
(4)
Initialize raster mode
Enter raster mode
When entering raster mode, raster mode is initialized.
The following shows the contents of the initialization.
• Raster page length setting (ESC * r P n NUL)
• Raster print quality setting (ESC * Q n NUL)
• Raster left margin setting (ESC * r m l n NUL)
• Raster right margin setting (ESC * r m r n NUL)
• Raster EOT mode setting (ESC FF EOT)
• Raster FF mode setting (ESC FF NUL)
• Clear raster image buffer
(*) Not initialized when raster mode is entered only when using raster data print color settings.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-91
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * r B
[Name] Quit raster mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
*
1B 2A
27 42
r
B
72 42
114 66
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Quits raster mode.
When raster mode is quit, and raster data remains in the raster mode image buffer, the raster mode
will be quit after executing raster EOT mode.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
ESC * r C
[Name] Clear raster data
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
*
1B 2A
27 42
r
C
72 43
114 67
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Clears the image buffer data of the raster mode.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-92
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * r D n NUL
[Name] Drawer drive
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
*
r
D
n
n
n
NUL
00
0
1B 2A
27 42
72 44
Decimal
114 68
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 3
Slip
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 0
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Drives the drawer in the raster mode.
Drawer drive conditions conform to line mode setting command ESC BEL n1 n2.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
n
0
1
2
3
Drive circuits
None
External device drive 1 drive
External device drive 2 drive
External device drive 1 drive and external device drive 2 drive
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-93
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * r E n NUL
[Name] Set raster EOT mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B 2A
27 42 114 69
*
r
E
n
n
n
NUL
00
0
72 45
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 12, 13
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 13
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Set raster EOT mode
The EOT mode operates to execute using the raster document quit command ESC FF EOT.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
EOT mode setting format
n
0
Form Feed
Set To Default
Cut Feed
Set To Default
Cutter
Set To Default
1
○ (*1)
○ (*1)
○ (*1)
○ (*1)
○ (*1)
○ (*1)
○ (*1)
--
--
2
○
--
3
Tear Bar
--
8
--
○
--
○
Full Cut
Full Cut
Partial Cut
Partial Cut
9
12
13
(*1) Form Feed
When the printer is a model handling BM and is set for BM to be effective, the set raster mode page
length is ignored and BM detecting is performed.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-94
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * r F n NUL
[Name] Set raster FF mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B 2A
27 42 114 70
*
r
F
n
n
n
NUL
00
0
72 46
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 12, 13
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 13
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets raster FF mode.
The FF mode operates to execute using the raster document quit command ESC FF NUL.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
FF mode setting format
n
0
Form Feed
Set To Default
Cut Feed
Set To Default
Cutter
Set To Default
1
○ (*1)
○ (*1)
○ (*1)
○ (*1)
○ (*1)
○ (*1)
○ (*1)
--
--
2
○
--
3
Tear Bar
--
8
--
○
--
○
Full Cut
Full Cut
Partial Cut
Partial Cut
9
12
13
(*1) Form Feed
When the printer is a model handling BM and is set for BM to be effective, the set raster mode page
length is ignored and BM detecting is performed.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-95
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * r P n NUL
[Name] Set raster page length
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
*
r
P
n
n
n
NUL
00
0
1B 2A
27 42
72 50
114 80
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Raster image buffer length
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets raster page length.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
n
Page length
0
Continuous print mode (no page length setting)
Specify page length
1 ≤ n
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
ESC * r Q n NUL
[Name] Set raster print quality
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B 2A
27 42 114 81
*
r
Q
n
n
n
NUL
00
0
72 51
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 2
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 0
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets raster print quality.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
n
0
1
2
• Print quality
Specify high speed printing
Normal print quality
High print quality
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-96
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * r m l n NUL
[Name] Set raster left margin
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
*
r
m
l
n
n
n
NUL
00
0
1B 2A
27 42
72
6D
6C
Decimal
114 109 108
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
Slip
Validation
[Initial Value]
Thermal
Slip
n = 0
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets raster left margin.
This command sets the left margin to (n x 8) dots.
When the left margin exceeds the printable area, or if the left margin specification eliminates the print
area ((printable region - right margin) ≥ left margin specified value), this command is ignored.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
ESC * r m r n NUL
[Name] Set raster right margin
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
*
r
m
6D
r
72
n
n
n
NUL
00
0
1B 2A
72
27 42 114
109
114
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 0
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets raster right margin.
This command sets the right margin to (n x 8) dots.
When the right margin exceeds the printable area, or if the right margin specification eliminates the
print area ((printable region - left margin) ≥ right margin) specified value, this command is ignored.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-97
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * r T n NUL
[Name] Set raster top margin
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B 2A
27 42 114 84
*
r
T
n
n
n
NUL
00
0
72 54
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 2
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets the raster top margin.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
n
0
1
2
Top margin
Set To Default
Set top margin using reverse paper feed.
Set standard top margin.
(*) This differs according to the model handling this command.
When in the raster mode, the top margin setting of line mode remains.
When quitting the raster mode, continue the top margin setting of the raster mode and return to the
line mode.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-98
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * r K n NUL
[Name] Set raster print color
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
*
r
K
n
n
n
NUL
00
0
1B 2A
27 42
72 4B
114 75
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 3
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
n = 0
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets raster print color.
This command is effective only when specifying the 2 color mode using the line mode.
This command is ignored when not in the 2 color print mode.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
n
0
1
2
3
Print color
Black
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
(*) This command is valid only when using a model that supports 2-color printing. This command is
ignored on non-compatible models.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-99
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
b n1 n2 data
[Name] Send raster data (auto line feed)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal 62 n1 n2 d1 d2
Decimal 98 n1 n2 d1 d2
b
n1 n2 d1 d2
... dk
... dk
... dk
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = n1 + n2 x 256, 1 ≤ k
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sends raster data.
Raster data is sent in (n1 + n2 x 256) byte counts as binary data.
Raster data exceeding the print area currently set is discarded.
The image buffer expanded position is automatically line fed one dot row and moved to the left mar-
gin on the next line after expanded the image buffer data 1 dot row using this command.
Also, data expansion is duplicated on the data in the current image buffer (OR process).
The following shows expanded image buffer for the set raster print color.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
Print color
Black
Expanded image buffer
Image buffer for black
Cyan
Image buffer for color
Magenta
Yellow
Image buffer for color
Image buffer for color
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-100
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
k n1 n2 data
[Name] Transfer raster data
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
k
n1 n2 d1 d2
6B n1 n2 d1 d2
107 n1 n2 d1 d2
... dk
... dk
... dk
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = n1 + n2 x 256, 1 ≤ k
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sends raster data.
Raster data is sent in (n1 + n2 x 256) byte counts as binary data.
Raster data exceeding the print area currently set is discarded.
The image buffer expanded position returns to the head of the current dot row without an automatic
line fed after expanding the image buffer data 1 dot row using this command.
Also, data expansion is duplicated on the data in the current image buffer (OR process).
The following shows expanded image buffer for the set raster print color.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
Print color
Black
Expanded image buffer
Image buffer for black
Cyan
Image buffer for color
Magenta
Yellow
Image buffer for color
Image buffer for color
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-101
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * r Y n NUL
[Name] Move vertical direction position (Line feed for specified dots)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B 2A
27 42 114 89
*
r
Y
n
n
n
NUL
00
0
72 59
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Moves vertical direction position.
Moves position n dots with this command.
When the current page length setting is in continuous print mode, and n dots exceed the remaining
dot count of the raster image buffer length, the data in the print buffer is printed, and paper is fed n
dots when this command is received.
Also, when the page length is set, data in the print buffer is printed, and paper is fed once the set
page length when this command is received. The remaining paper feed is performed at the print ex-
ecution command thereafter.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
ESC FF NUL
[Name] Execute FF mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC FF NUL
1B 0C
27 12
00
0
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Executes FF mode.
Executes operation specified by the FF mode setting command ESC * r F n NUL.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-102
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC FF EOT
[Name] Execute EOT mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC FF EOT
1B 0C
27 12
04
4
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Executes EOT mode.
Executes operation specified by the EOT mode setting command ESC * r E n NUL.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
ESC * r N n NUL
[Name] Discard specified byte count of data
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
*
r
N
n
n
n
NUL
1B 2A
27 42
72 4E
0
0
114 78
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 9999
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Discard specified byte count of data
The number of bytes specified by n and later-received data are received and discarded.
n is a decimal description (max. 4 digits) using ASCII characters.
This command is value only when in raster mode.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-103
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * r V m n NUL
[Name] Execute external buzzer drive
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B 2A
27 42 114 86 49
*
r
V
1
n
n
n
NUL
72 56 31
0
0
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
m = 49, 50, 1 ≤ n ≤ 20
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Repeatedly drives the buzzer according to the ON/OFF conditions set by the external buzzer drive
pulse condition command ESC GS EM DC1 m n1 n2.
m specifies the buzzer drive terminal to drive.
Buzzer Drive Terminals
m
49
50
Buzzer drive terminal 1
Buzzer drive terminal 2
Specifies the number of times to repeat buzzer drive with n.
Buzzer cannot ring while printer is printing.
This command is prohibited for use for anything other than ringing the buzzer.
(When this command is used for the drawer drive on models equipped with an external device termi-
nal, it will be damaged, so it is absolutely prohibited.) )
The buzzer can be stopped by pressing the FEED switch or the RELEASE switch while the buzzer is
ringing, or opening the receipt cover or the slip cover.
It is necessary to set the conditions prior to entering raster mode using the external buzzer drive
pulse conditions command ESC GS EM DC1 m n1 n2.
n is a decimal description (max. 255 digits) using ASCII characters.
[Ex.:]
n1 = 8
ON
OFF
Drive Pulse
OFF
ON
Printing/Paper Feed Prohibited
Print Operation
(Note) If the off time is set to 0 (zero), it is possible to ring the buzzer
continuously for the amount of n1. For example, if on = 5 seconds, off = 0,
and n1 = 20 times, the buzzer will ring for 100 seconds.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Use prohibited.
3-104
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-5) Black Mark Related Command Details
The following commands control top of form functions using black mark paper.
The following commands are effective only when black mark is set to be effective.
ESC d n
[Name] Auto - cutter:
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
d
64
n
n
n
27
100
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 3, 48 ≤ n ≤ 51 (“0” ≤ n ≤ “3”)
Slip
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Executes the auto-cutter.
After auto-cutter is executed, the printer considers that to be the top of the page.
n
Auto cutter
0, 48
Full cut at the current position.
Print data in line buffer is printed before a full cut.
This command is ignored if the printer is not equipped with an auto-cutter.
Partial cut at the current position.
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
Print data in line buffer is printed before a partial cut.
This command is ignored if the printer is not equipped with an auto-cutter.
After executing top of form, paper is fed to cutting position, then a full cut.
Print data in line buffer is printed before the operation described above.
This command is ignored if the printer is not equipped with an auto-cutter.
After executing top of form, paper is fed to cutting position, then a partial cut.
Print data in line buffer is printed before the operation described above.
This command is ignored if the printer is not equipped with an auto-cutter.
(*) The auto-cutter function operates in the following ways on models that only have a full cut or a
partial cut.
• Models that perform only a full cut.:
Executes a full cut when for instructions calling for a
partial cut.
• Models that perform only a partial cut.:
Executes a partial cut when there are for instructions
calling for a full cut.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Three bytes ignored
3-105
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
FF
[Name] Execute top of form
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal 0C
Decimal 12
FF
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Slip
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Executes top of form.
<Slip>, <Validation>
One byte ignored
ESC C n
[Name] Set page length to n lines
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
C
n
n
n
1B 43
27 67
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 127
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
-
[Initial Value]
(Form feed amount initial value x 42)
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
When black mark is effective, this command is ignored.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Three bytes ignored
3-106
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC C 0 n
[Name] Set page length to n x 24 mm units
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
C
0
0
0
n
n
n
1B 43
27 67
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 22
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
(Form feed amount initial value x 42)
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
When black mark is effective, this command is ignored.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Four bytes ignored
3-107
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
VT
[Name] Feed paper to vertical tab position
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal 0B
Decimal 11
VT
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Slip
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
When black mark is effective, this command is ignored.
<Slip>, <Validation>
One byte ignored
ESC B n1 n2 … nk NUL
[Name] Set vertical tab position
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
B
n1 n2
.. nk NUL
1B 42 n1 n2
27 66 n1 n2
.. nk
.. nk
00
0
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 255, 0 ≤ k ≤ 16
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
When black mark is effective, this command is ignored.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Received and discarded up to <NUL>.
3-108
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC B NUL
[Name] Clear vertical tab position
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
B
NUL
00
0
1B 42
27 66
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
When black mark is effective, this command is ignored.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Three bytes ignored
3-109
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-6) 2-Color Printing Command Details
The following commands control 2-color printing functions.
The following commands are effective only when using a model handling 2-color printing.
ESC RS c n
[Name] Set print color in 2-color print mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
RS
c
n
n
n
1E 63
30 99
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 1, 48 ≤ n ≤ 49, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “1”)
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 0, 48 (When in 2-color print mode)
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies print color in 2 color print mode.
This command is ignored when not in the 2-color print mode.
Specifies black for the print color when in 2-color print mode.
The specification of this command is cleared only when the printer is reset.
The specification of this command is not cleared by ESC @ CAN.
However, print color is initialized to black by the ESC @ and CAN only when in the compatible 2-
color print mode.
n
Specifies 2-color print mode color
0, 48
1, 49
Black
Red
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-110
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC RS C n
[Name] Select/cancel 2-color print mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
RS
C
n
n
n
1E 43
30 67
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 2, 48 ≤ n ≤ 50 (“0” ≤ n ≤ “2”), n = 16, n =32
Slip
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 0, 48
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
n
Print Mode Specification
0, 48
1, 49
16
Single Color Mode
2-color Mode
Low-power Consumption Mode
Double Resolution Mode
32
• This command is ignored when the low-power consumption mode is selected by the DIP switches.
• The specification of this command is not cleared by ESC @ CAN.
• Prints data in line buffer, if unprinted data exists in the line buffer.
• This command is processed after quitting the current print.
• Commands that select the same mode are ignored in the currently selected mode.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-111
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC 4
[Name] (Thermal) Specify black/white inversion/(Slip) specify black/white inversion/specify red/black color
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
4
1B 34
27 52
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
White/black inversion cancelled
White/black inversion cancelled/black color printing specified
White/black inversion cancelled/black color printing specified
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies white/black inversion for ANK characters and Kanji characters.
IBM block ignores white/black inversion.
<Slip>, <Validation>
This command function is based on the selection of red/black substitute function.
The red/black substitute function is selected by the memory switch or the command ESC GS 4 m n.
For details on selecting the red/black substitute function using a command, see the explanation of
ESC GS 4 below, and for details on selecting the red/black substitute function using the memory
switch, see the printer specifications manual.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
ESC 5
[Name] (Thermal) Cancel black/white inversion/(Slip) cancel black/white inversion/specify red/black color
[Code] ASCII ESC
Hexadecimal
Decimal
5
1B 35
27 53
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
White/black inversion cancelled
White/black inversion cancelled/black color printing specified
White/black inversion cancelled/black color printing specified
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Cancels white/black inversion for ANK characters and Kanji characters.
<Slip>, <Validation>
This command function is based on the selection of red/black substitute function.
The red/black substitute function is selected by the memory switch or the command ESC GS 4 m n.
For details on selecting the red/black substitute function using a command, see the explanation of
ESC GS 4 below, and for details on selecting the red/black substitute function using the memory
switch, see the printer specifications manual.
(Note) The settings using this command are valid for all stations and modes.
3-112
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC RS d n
[Name] Set print density
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC RS
d
n
n
n
1B
27
1E
64
Decimal
30 100
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 15
48 ≤ n ≤ 57 (“0” ≤ n ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n ≤ 70 (“A” ≤ n ≤ “F”)
:
:
:
:
:
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Memory switch setting
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets print density.
This command stops printing to be executed.
When in 2-color print mode, this can set the print density of red print.
n
Print Density
Single Color Printing Mode
Print density 1.3
Print density 1.2
Print density 1.1
Print density 1.0
Print density 0.9
Print density 0.8
Print density 0.7
(Reserved)
2-color Printing Mode Red Print Density
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
4, 52
5, 53
6, 54
7, 55
8, 56
9, 57
10, 65
11, 66
12, 67
13, 68
14, 69
15, 70
Print density 1.2
Print density 1.2
Print density 1.0
Print density 1.0
Print density 1.0
Print density 0.8
Print density 0.8
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-113
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC RS r n
[Name] Set printing speed
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
RS
1E
r
n
n
n
1B
27
72
30 114
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 2, 48 ≤ n ≤ 50, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “2”)
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Memory switch setting
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets print speed.
This command stops printing to be executed.
Because 2-color print mode prints in one speed, the speed settings with this command are invalid.
This command setting becomes valid when returned from the two-color print mode to the single color
print mode.
n
Print Speed
Single Color Printing Mode
High speed
2-color Printing Mode
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
2-color Printing Mode Speed
2-color Printing Mode Speed
2-color Printing Mode Speed
Mid-speed
Slow speed
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-114
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC FS q n [x11 x12 y11 y12 d1 … dk]1 … [xn1 xn2 yn1 yn2 d1 … dk] n
[Name] Register logo
ESC FS
1B 1C
q
n
n
n
[x11
[x11
[x11
x12
x12
x12
y11 y12 d1 .. dk]1 .. [xn1 xn2 yn1 yn2 d1 .. dk]n
y11 y12 d1 .. dk]1 .. [xn1 xn2 yn1 yn2 d1 .. dk]n
y11 y12 d1 .. dk]1 .. [xn1 xn2 yn1 yn2 d1 .. dk]n
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
71
27
28 113
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ xn1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ xn2 ≤ 3 1 ≤ (xn1 + xn2 x 256) ≤ 1023
0 ≤ yn1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ yn2 ≤ 1 1 ≤ (yn1 + yn2 x 256) ≤ 288
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = {(xn1 + xn2 x 256) x (yn1 + yn2 x 256) x 8}
Slip
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ xn1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ xn2 ≤ 3 1 ≤ (xn1 + xn2 x 256) ≤ 1023
0 ≤ yn1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ yn2 ≤ 1 1 ≤ (yn1 + yn2 x 256) ≤ 288
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = {(xn1 + xn2 x 256) x (yn1 + yn2 x 256) x 8}
Validation
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ xn1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ xn2 ≤ 3 1 ≤ (xn1 + xn2 x 256) ≤ 1023
0 ≤ yn1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ yn2 ≤ 1 1 ≤ (yn1 + yn2 x 256) ≤ 288
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = {(xn1 + xn2 x 256) x (yn1 + yn2 x 256) x 8}
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
-
-
-
Validation
Parameter details
• n:
Specifies registered logo count
• xn1, xn2:
• yn1, yn2:
• d:
Horizontal size of registered logo {(xn1 + xn2 x 256) x 8} dots
Vertical size of registered logo {(yn1 + yn2 x 256) x 8} dots
Registered logo data
• k:
Logo data count
This command should be specified at the top of the line.
When the first parameter is determined to be free of error, the printer starts processing this com-
mand.
When logo register processing starts, all previously defined data is deleted.(It is not possible to re-
register a portion of a plurality of defined logo data.)
Logo registration numbers are defined in rising order from 1.
If the defined area specified by the parameter is not empty, or if there is an error in the parameter
specification, register processing is aborted.(The pre-registered and complete data is effective.)
The printer should be reset if logo registration is completed or register processing is aborted.
If an error occurs while performing register processing (the time from when the first parameter is OK
until the printer initialization is completed after registering a logo), error processing, mechanical op-
eration and status processing cannot be performed. Also, data must not be sent from the host during
that time.
This command is executed only for logo registration and does not accompany the printing operation.
Logos are printed using the ESC FS p (print NV logo) command.
• The NV memory capacity is 4 Mbits (512 Kbytes = 524,288 bytes).
However, 4 Kbytes (4,096 bytes) are kept as parameter information separate to the data so the data
region memory capacity is 520,192 Bytes.
Ex.:
When the registered data size per each one is 6 Kbytes (6,144 bytes), it is possible to regis-
ter 520,192/6144 = 84.
<When registering logos for 2 color printing>
Registration is possible regardless of the 2 color printing mode being specified or cancelled. Register
logos with the same capacity as the logo register number k (odd number) and k + 1 (even number).
If the capacity differs or the logo register number is 255, this command is ignored by the logo print
command in the 2 color print mode.
3-115
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
(Note) The registered data is shared by all stations and modes.
If this command is used frequently, there is the possibility of damaging the non-volatile
memory. Write to the non-volatile memory less than 10 times in one day.
Relationship of logo and registered data
xn = xn1 + xn2 x 256, yn = yn1 + yn2 x 256
{ (xn 1 + xn2 x 256) x 8 } dot
Data
MSB
d(n1)
d(n2)
d(11)
d(21)
d(22)
d(12)
(yn1 + yn2 x 256) bite
(yn1 + yn2 x 256) x 8 dot
LSB
d(x1)
d(x2)
d(xn)
3-116
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC FS p n m
[Name] Print logo
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC FS
1B 1C
p
n
n
n
m
m
m
70
Decimal
27 28 112
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ m ≤ 3, 48 ≤ m ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ m ≤ “3”)
Slip
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ m ≤ 3, 48 ≤ m ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ m ≤ “3”)
Validation
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ m ≤ 3, 48 ≤ m ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ m ≤ “3”)
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
-
-
-
Validation
Prints the logo of registration number n registered using the logo registration command ESC FS q
according to the print mode m.
n: Logo Specification
Function
n
1 to 255
Specified logo number
m: Printing Mode
m
Logo print mode
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
Normal mode
Double wide mode
Double high mode
Double high/wide mode
If the parameter is within the defined region, execute this command after printing the unprinted data
in the line buffer.
(Unprinted data is printed regardless of whether the specified logo was registered by n.) )
It is not possible to print with other data in one line (characters, bit images, bar codes).
Form feed obeys the vertical print size of the logo.
Print modes, excluding upside-down printing (enhanced, double, underline, character size, black/
white inverted, and 90˚ right rotation) are unaffected.
If the logo horizontal print size exceeds the horizontal print region, the portion exceeding the area is
not printed.
Logos are printed according to the following command settings.
• Left margin (ESC I n)
• Right margin (ESC Q n)
• Position alignment (ESC GS a n)
• Absolute position movement (ESC GS A n1 n2)
• Relative position movement (ESC GS R n1 n2)
• Horizontal tab (HT)
• Upside-down printing (SI)
<When using the 2 color print mode>
When the logo register number n is odd:
Register number n is printed in black; register number n + 1 is printed in red and overlapped.
The command is ignored when the capacity of the register number n and the capacity of the
register number n + 1 are different.
The command is ignored when the register number n = 255 is specified.
When the logo register number n is even:
Register number n is printed in black; register number n - 1 is printed in red and overlapped.
The command is ignored when the capacity of the register number n and the capacity of the
register number n - 1 are different.
The command is ignored when the register number n = 255 is specified.
3-117
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-7) Mark Command Details
This command is specialized to mark sheet printing for lotteries. This command can print lines.
Print Sample
<Print Sample>
L O T T E R Y 1 0
01 05 32 85 86 50 70 77 08
50 21 42 46 40 12 02 06 78
Mark Printing
2003/04/08 STAR Micronics co.., ltd
No. 0304081254896
Command Transmission Example
• Mark Format
Mark Height h = 10 dots; Mark Line Feed Amount V = 20 dots
Mark number 0: Mark Color c = White; Mark Horizontal Width w = 16 dots
Mark number 1: Mark Color c = Black; Mark Horizontal Width w = 40 dots
Mark number 2: Mark Color c = White; Mark Horizontal Width w = 40 dots
Mark 1
Hor. W
Mark 0
Hor. W
Mark 2
Hor. W
Mark height h
Mark 1
Mark 1
Mark 1
Mark 0
Mark 0
Mark 0
Mark 1
Mark 2
Mark 1
Mark 0
Mark 0
Mark 0
Mark 1
Mark 1
Mark 2
Mark 0
Mark 0
Mark 0
Mark 2
Mark 1
Mark 2
Mark LF amount v
Mark height h
Mark height h
Mark LF amount v
Mark LF amount v
• Transmission Example
(1) Mark Height; Line Feed Amount Setting
<ESC> <GS> * 1 h v (h = “010”, v = “020”)
(2) Color of Each Mark Number, Horizontal Width Setting
<ESC> <GS> * 2 m c w (Mark Number 0 Setting: m = “0”, c = “0”, w = “016”)
<ESC> <GS> * 2 m c w (Mark Number 0 Setting: m = “1”, c = “1”, w = “040”)
<ESC> <GS> * 2 m c w (Mark Number 0 Setting: m = “2”, c = “0”, w = “040”)
(3) Register mark format specified by (1) and (2) in advance to the non-volatile memory.
(It is possible to print a mark without registering in the non-volatile memory.)
<ESC> <GS> * W
(4) Mark Printing
<ESC><GS> * 0 n m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m7
(n = “007”, m1 = “1”, m2 = “0”, m3 = “1”, m4 = “0”, m5 = “1”, m6 = “0”, m7 = “2”)
<ESC><GS> * 0 n m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m7
(n = “007”, m1 = “1”, m2 = “0”, m3 = “2”, m4 = “0”, m5 = “1”, m6 = “0”, m7 = “1”)
<ESC><GS> * 0 n m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m7
(n = “007”, m1 = “1”, m2 = “0”, m3 = “1”, m4 = “0”, m5 = “2”, m6 = “0”, m7 = “2”)
3-118
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS * 0 n m1 m2 m3 … mk
[Name] Print Mark
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
*
0
n
n
n
m1
m1
m1
m2 m3
m2 m3
m2 m3
... mk
... mk
... mk
1D 2A 30
29 42 48
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
“001” ≤ n ≤ “255”, “0” ≤ m ≤ “9”, k = n
Slip
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Prints mark number specified by m, based on the pre-specified mark format (mark height, mark line
feed amount, mark color, and mark horizontal width).
n indicates the number of marks to print. When there are 10 marks (m1 to m10), n = “010.”
m indicates the mark number to print.
n, m are ASCII character strings that are expressed in decimal. They are composed of character
codes from “0” to “9.”
This command is ignored if print data exists in the image buffer.
Therefore, this cannot exist with other print data (characters, bit images, bar codes).
If the specified mark does not fit in the remaining print region, the number of bytes specified by n are
received and discarded.
If n is outside of the defined area, data thereafter is processed as normal data.
This command is affected by position alignment, left margin, position movement, position such as
horizontal tabs, and upside-down printing.
<Slip>, <Validation>
All data received and discarded.
3-119
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS * 1 h v
[Name] Specify mark height and line feed
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
*
1
h
h
h
v
v
v
1D 2A 31
29 42 49
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
“001” ≤ h ≤ “255”, “001” ≤ v ≤ “255”, h ≤ v
Slip
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Non-volatile memory
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies mark height and line feed
v indicates mark height (number of dots); v indicates mark line feed amount (number of dots).
h, v are ASCII character strings that are expressed in decimal. They are composed of character
codes from “0” to “9.”
If a small line feed amount is specified, there is the possibility that intermittent printing could occur,
so a setting of v = 16 dots or higher is recommended.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
ESC GS * 2 m c w
[Name] Specifies mark color and mark horizontal width in each mark number.
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
D
*
2
m
m
m
c
c
c
w
w
w
1
2A 32
27
29 42 50
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
“0” ≤ m ≤ “9”, “0” ≤ c ≤ ”1”, “001” ≤ w ≤ “999”
Slip
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
Non-volatile memory
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies mark color and mark horizontal width in each mark number.
m indicates the mark number.
c indicates the mark color.
w indicates the mark horizontal width (number of dots).
If w exceeds the currently set print region, this command is ignored.
m, c, w are ASCII character strings that are expressed in decimal. They are composed of character
codes from “0” to “9.”
c
Mark Color
“0”(48)
“1”(49)
White
Black
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-120
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS * W
[Name] Register mark format to non-volatile memory
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
1B
GS
*
W
1D 2A 57
29 42 87
Decimal
27
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Slip
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Registers the mark format (mark height, mark line feed amount, mark color, and mark horizontal
width) in non-volatile memory.
After registration to the non-volatile memory, execute a printer reset.
ESC GS * C
[Name] Initialize mark format in non-volatile memory
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
*
C
1D 2A 43
29 42 67
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Initializes the mark format (mark height, mark line feed amount, mark color, and mark horizontal
width) registered in non-volatile memory.
After initialization, resets the printer.
Mark Format Initial Value
• Mark Height:
• Mark Line Feed Amount:
• Mark Color:
“016” (16 dots)
“032” (32 dots)
“0” (White
→ All Mark Numbers)
• Mark Horizontal Width:
“080” (80 dots) → All Mark Numbers)
3-121
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-8) AUTO LOGO Function Command Details
If the portion that was changed was only the product name in a system, like the one below, already operating, this
command functions to print a logo like the one below by only changing the product name. This function has two oper-
ating modes.
1) Standard Auto Logo Function
Preset the Auto Logo function, and execute the following operations with the printing cut command under the existing
system as a trigger.
(1) Auto Logo function starts up using the existing system cut command as a trigger.
(2) Execute printing if print data exists in the image buffer.
(3) Execute user macro 1.
(4) Auto Logo Printing
(5) Execute user macro 2.
By Auto Logo embedding a preset command character “/” and the logo number “2” to print, in the current print data,
logo 2 is printed by the (4) Auto Logo Print. In other words, If “CHEESE BURGER / 2” is registered as a product, a
coupon for logo 2 will automatically printed for the purchaser of the cheese burger. Also, if logo 1 of the header is
used in the company logo, and “cut command + logo 1 print command” are registered in the user macro 2 of (5), the
company name of logo 1 will be printed. The user macro 1 of (3) is used when a center alignment of the auto logo is
necessary. In such a case, it is necessary to register the left alignment command in the user macro 2 of (5), and to
return based on the settings.
Header
㩷
Logo1㩷
********************
MCDONALD’S
********************
㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㩷
********************
1
C.
HEESEBURGER $2.00
㩷㪤 㪘 㪚 㪛 㪦 㪥 㪘 㪣 㪛 㪪 㩷
MCDONALD’S
2 C. OKE $1.00
㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㩷
********************
---------------------------------
TOTAL $3.00㩷
㪈㪅㪚㪟㪜㪜㪪㪙㪬㪞㪜㪩㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩻㪉㪅㪇㪇㩷
2㪉C.㪅㪚O㪦K㪢E㪜㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩻$1㪈.㪅0㪇㪇0㩷
1.CHEESEBURGER $2.00
㩷
Current System
Print Dataꢀ
---------------------------------
㪫㪦㪫㪘㪣㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩻㩷㪊㪅㪇㪇㩷
㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㩷
TOTAL
$3.00㩷
1. AutoLogo triggered by cut
command
3. User macro 1 executed
Partial Cut㩷
Current System Print Dataꢀ
㪣㫆㪾㫆㪉㩷
㩷C㩷㩷h㩷e㩷e㪟s㪼e㪸bu㪻r㪼g㫉e㩷r
㩷
Partial Cutꢀ
4. AutoLogo printedꢀ
COKE
㩷
Logo3㩷
5. User macro 2 executed
Paper is cut
Header logo is printeꢀd
Header
㩷
********************
MCDONALD’S
3-122
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
2) Simple Auto Logo Function
Preset the simple Auto Logo function, and execute the following operations with the printing cut command under the
existing system as a trigger.
(1) Simple Auto Logo function starts up using the existing system cut command as a trigger.
(2) Center alignment command process
(3) Execute printing of logo 2.
(4) Paper is fed to cutting position, then a partial cut is executed.
(5) Execute printing of logo 1.
(6) Recover position alignment command to setting to before execution of simple Auto Logo
With the simple Auto Logo function the logo number of the logo to print is predetermined.
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷Header
ꢀ
Logo1㩷
********************
MCDONALD’S
㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㩷
********************
********************
1.CHEESEBURGER $2.00
㩷㪤 㪘 㪚 㪛 㪦 㪥 㪘 㪣 㪛 㪪 㩷
MCDONALD’S
2.COKE
$1.00
㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㪁 㩷
********************
---------------------------------
TOTAL $3.00㩷
㪈㪅㪚㪟㪜㪜㪪㪙㪬㪞㪜㪩㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩻㪉㪅㪇㪇㩷
2㪉.C㪅㪚O㪦K㪢㪜E㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩻$㪈1㪅.㪇0㪇0㩷
1.CHEESEBURGER $2.00
㩷
Current System
Print Dataꢀ
-----------------------------------
㪫㪦㪫㪘㪣㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩻㩷㪊㪅㪇㪇㩷
㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㩷
TOTAL
$3.00㩷
1. AutoLogo triggered by cut command
2. Center alignment
3. Logo2 is printedꢀ
Current System Print Data
ꢀ
Footer
㩷
Logo2㩷
4. Paper is fed to cutting position and
partially cꢀut
5. Logo1 is printed.
6. Returns to position alignmentꢀ
Header
㩷
Logo1㩷
********************
MCDONALD’S
㩷
3-123
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Command Transmission Example
1) Set the Auto Logo function in advance and register to the non-volatile memory.
ESC GS / 1 n ( n = 0x01 ):
ESC GS / 2 n ( n = “/” ):
ESC GS / 3 nL nH d1 d2 … dk:
nL = 4 nH = 0:
Auto Logo Function ON
Auto Logo Command Character (“/”) Specification
User macro 1 definition
Register macro data count = 4 bytes
Registration macro
d1 = 0x1b d2 = 0x1d d2 = 0x61 d3 = 0x01:
<ESC GS a 1: Center alignment>
User macro 2 definition
Register macro data count = 12 bytes
Registered macro <ESC d 3: Cut position partial Cut>
ESC GS / 4 nL nH d1 d2 … dk:
nL = 12 nH = 0:
d1 = 0x1b d2 = 0x64 d3 = 0x03:
d4 = 0x1b d5 = 0x1c d6 = 0x70 d7 = 0x01 d8 = 0x00: <ESC FS p 1 0 : Logo 1 print>
d9 = 0x1b d10 = 0x1d d11 = 0x61 d12 = 0x00: <ESC GS a 0: Left alignment>
ESC GS / 5 n ( n = 0x01 ):
ESC GS / 6 n ( n = 0x01 ):
ESC GS / W:
Auto Logo command character, space conversion
Partial cut valid just prior to Auto Logo printing
Register Auto Logo definition data to
non-volatile memory.
2) Embed registered command character in print data and transmit.
“CHEESE BURGER/2” → “/” is recognized as the command character.
The command character is converted to a space and “2” specifies logo 2.
3-124
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS / W
[Name] Register Auto Logo setting to non-volatile memory
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1b
GS
1d
/
W
2f 57
27
29 47 87
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Registers Auto Logo setting to non-volatile memory.
After registration ends, resets the printer.
This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing.
ESC GS / C
[Name] Initialize Auto Logo setting from non-volatile memory
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1b
GS
1d
/
C
2f 43
27
29 47 67
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
Slip
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Initializes registered data of the Auto Logo function in the non-volatile memory.
After initialization ends, resets the printer.
This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing.
The following shows the initial values of the Auto Logo function.
Initial Value
Auto Logo Function
OFF
Command Character
User Macro 1
None
None
User Macro 2
None
Convert Command Character
Partial Cut Prior to Auto Logo Printing
Do not print
Invalid
3-125
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS / 1 n
[Name] Set ON/OFF for Auto Logo function
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
1b
GS
1d
/
1
n
n
n
2f 31
Decimal
27
29 47 49
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 2
Slip
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 0
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets ON/OFF for Auto Logo function.
This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS / W command.
When in the raster mode, the Auto Logo function is ignored.
This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing.
n
0
1
Setting
Auto Logo Function OFF
Standard Auto Logo Function ON
<Operating Specifications>
(1) Auto Logo function starts up using the existing system cut command as a trigger.
(2) Execute printing if print data exists in the image buffer.
(3) Execute user macro 1.
(4) Auto Log Printing
(5) Execute user macro 2.
2
Simple Auto Logo Function ON
<Operating Specifications>
(1) Auto Logo function starts up using the existing system cut command as a trigger.
(2) Execute printing if print data exists in the image buffer.
(3) Execute center alignment.
(4) Print logo 2 (2-color printing setting: Logo 3)
(5) Paper is fed to cutting position, then a partial cut is executed.
(6) Printing of logo 1.
(7) Recover position alignment setting
(Note)
When this is set, user macros and command characters are invalid.
When this is set, the command character “/” is printed as “/”. )
The following shows the command that is the trigger for the Auto Logo function.
If the standard Auto Logo function is turned ON by n = 1, the trigger command below functions only
as a trigger, so the cutting operation is not executed. Therefore, it is necessary to register an arbi-
trary cutting command in user macro 2.
If the simple Auto Logo function is turned ON by n = 2, the cutting command is executed, and is the
trigger for the simple Auto Logo function.
• ESC d n:
• FF:
Cut Command
Allocated to cut function
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-126
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS / 2 n
[Name] Set command characters
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC GS
/
3
n
n
n
1b
27
1d
2f 32
29 47 50
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
32 ≤ n ≤ 127, n = 0
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 0
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets command character for the Auto Logo function.
This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS / W command.
This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing.
n
32 to 127
0
Setting
Command Character
No set command characters
Command characters are characters that are commands for specifying the logo number to print with
Auto Logo printing.
If the “/” is specified for the command character, “/2/3” is embedded in the print data.
The printer processes “/” not as character data but as a command, stores the number continuing af-
ter, and prints as an Auto Logo in the stored order.
Therefore, if “/2/3/” is embedded, the Auto Logo is printed in the order of logo 2, logo 3.
At that time, if the specified logo is not registered, logo printing is ignored.
If the setting is for not command character setting, no logo will be printed.
Note that “/2/3” is processed as a command so there is no print.
However, “/2/3/” is converted to a space by the ESC GS /5 n command.
Also, only the initial logo is printed if the same logo is duplicated, such as in “/2/3/2/2.”
32 logos can be stored as Auto Logos.
Continuing the command character, the following shows the defined area of the character d of the
logo number specification.
“1” ≤ d ≤ “9”
(49 ≤ d ≤ 57) → Logo number 1 to 9
“A” ≤ d ≤ “F”
(65 ≤ d ≤ 70) → Logo number 10 to 16
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-127
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS / 3 nL nH d1 d2 … dk
[Name] Set user macro 1
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1b
GS
1d
/
3
nL nH d1 d2
... dk
... dk
... dk
2f 33 nL nH d1 d2
27
29 47 51 nL nH d1 d2
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
1 ≤ nL ≤ 64, nH = 0
1 ≤ (nL + nH x 256) ≤ 64
dk = (nL + nH x 256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
No user macro 1 setting
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets user macro 1 for the Auto Logo function.
This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS / W command.
This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing.
Registers print data in user macro 1.
Maximum 64 bytes of registered data
Note that registering Auto Logo command characters in the user macros is prohibited.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-128
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS / 4 nL nH d1 d2 … dk
[Name] Set user macro 2
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1b
GS
1d
/
4
nL nH d1 d2
... dk
... dk
... dk
2f 34 nL nH d1 d2
27
29 47 52 nL nH d1 d2
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
1 ≤ nL ≤ 64, nH = 0
1 ≤ (nL + nH x 256) ≤ 64
dk = (nL + nH x 256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
No user macro 2 setting
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets user macro 2 for the Auto Logo function.
This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS / W command.
This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing.
Registers print data in user macro 2.
Maximum 64 bytes of registered data
Note that registering Auto Logo command characters in the user macros is prohibited.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-129
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS / 5 n
[Name] Set command character switching method
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
1b
GS
1d
/
5
n
n
n
2f 35
Decimal
27
29 47 53
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 1
Slip
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 0
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets command character conversion method for the Auto Logo function.
This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS / W command.
This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing.
n
0
1
Setting
Does not print command character or logo number continuing after that.
Converts the command character and logo number that follows in a space character (0 x 20).
If “/” is specified for the command character, the “/2” embedded in the print data is processed not as
a character string but as a command.
At that time, “/2” is processed as a command so there is no print.
However, “/2” is converted to a space by the n = 1 specification of this command.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-130
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS / 6 n
[Name] Partial cut setting just prior to Auto Logo printing
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1b
GS
1d
/
6
n
n
n
2f 36
27
29 47 54
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 1
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 0
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets the partial cut setting just prior to Auto Logo printing
This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS / W command.
This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing.
n
0
1
Setting
Does not execute partial cut just prior to Auto Logo printing
Executes partial cut just prior to Auto Logo printing
Header
***************
********************
MACDONALDS
MCDONALD’S
***************
********************
1.CHEESBUGER
2.COKKEE
$2.00
$1..00
1.CHEESEBURGER $2.00
-----------------------------------
- -- -- -- --- -- -- --- -- -- -
TOTAL $3.00
TOTAL $3.00
1. AutoLogo triggered by cut
command
Partial Cut
2. User macro 1 is executed
CheeHseeabduerger
COKE
Logo2 is printed
Partial Cut
3. AutoLogo is printed.
Logo3 is printed
4. User macro 2 is executed.
Paper is cut.
Head logo is printed
Header
********************
MCDONALD’S
3-131
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
This command selects execution of a partial cut just prior to Auto Logo Logo 2, and Logo 3, when
executing Logos 2 and 3 as an Auto Logo print, as shown above.
If a partial cut is set to be executed by this function, it is possible to supply coupons printed by Auto
Logo cut by the partial cut.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-132
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-9) 2-dimensional Bar Codes PDF417 Command Details
This command prints 2-dimensional bar codes PDF417.
Commands for 2-dimensional bar codes PDF417 are separated into the following four functions.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Bar code type setting
Bar code data setting
Bar code printing
(<ESC> <GS> “x” “S”)
(<ESC> <GS> “x” “D”)
(<ESC> <GS> “x” “P”)
(<ESC> <GS> “x” “I”)
Get bar code expansion information
The details of the functions are outlined below.
1)
Bar code type setting
These commands set the bar code type.
These are all set to default. Only use them if you wish to make changes. (Refer to following details for settings.) )
ꢀ
p1
p2
START
STOP
PDF417 are composed of fixed patterns for start and stop, and bar patterns called code words.
Code words are composed of 17 modules.
4
1 1 1 1 1
3
5
<Code Word>
Specify the p1 and p2 values using <ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “0.”
With the USE_LIMITS mode, specify the ratio of p1 and p2; with the USE_FIXED mode, specify the p1 (number of
lines) and p2 (number of code words per line).
Specify the error correction level value using <ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “1.”
It is possible to read PDF417 even part of the data is corrupted, using error correction.
If this level is raised, the bar code size is increased because there is more backup information.
Specify the size of the module that composes code words using <ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “2” and <ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “3.”
The X direction size of the module is determined by <ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “2” and the Y direction size of the module is
determined from an aspect ratio using <ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “3.”
The module size setting is the basis for the generated bar code image, so print results will differ according to these
settings.
<Printable Bar Code Size>
Vertical Size (Dots)
640
Horizontal Size (Dots)
640
3-133
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
These are individual settings, so the following errors may occur even if there are no problems. In such cases, the bar
code will not be generated, and the (3) print command ((<ESC> <GS> “x” “P”) will be ignored.
• An error occurs when generating the bar code by the combination of bar code settings.
• When the generated bar code exceeds the printable PDF417 size.
• When the print data exceeds the currently set print region.
It is recommended to use the (4) Get bar code expansion information command (<ESC> <GS> “x” “I”) as a means for
checking for these errors prior to printing.
2) Bar code data setting command
This command set the bar code print data.
3) Bar code printing command
This command prints the bar codes based on the settings of (1) and (2).
4) Get bar code expansion information command
This command checks whether a bar code can be printed based on the settings of (1) and (2).
= Precautions When Using the Commands =
• For (1) and (2), the setting values are retained if the following operations are not applied.
• New setting command is sent.
• Initialize commands are sent (<ESC> @, <CAN>)
• Power is turned off.
• With regard to (3) and (4), send as needed.
• Printing
• When printing, the horizontal tabs, absolute position specification, relative position specification, and position
movement using position alignment are valid.
• Upside down printing and 2-color printing are possible.
• Bar codes to be printed should always be confirmed through an actual printout.
Lastly is a command transmission example.
(1) Bar code type setting
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “0” 0 2 3:
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “1” 3:
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “2” 3:
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “3” 3:
Sets bar code size to USE_LIMITS = 2:3
Sets ECC level to 3.
Sets module X direction size to 3 dots.
Sets module aspect ratio to 3.
(2) Bar code data setting
<ESC> <GS> “x” “D” 10 0 “0123456789”: Sets bar code data.
(3) Print bar code
To confirm printability using the current settings, confirm the bar code expansion information.
<ESC> <GS> “x” “I”: Confirms bar code expansion information.
<ESC> <GS> “x” “P”: Prints
3-134
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS x S 0 n p1 p2
[Name] PDF417 bar code size setting
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
x
S
0
n
n
n
p1 p2
p1 p2
p1 p2
78 53 30
27
29 120 83 48
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
n = 0, 1
When n = 0 1 ≤ p1 ≤ 99, 1 ≤ p2 ≤ 99
When n = 1 p1 = 0 or 3 ≤ p1 ≤ 90, p2 = 0 or 1 ≤ p2 ≤ 30 (However, this excludes p1 = p2 =
0.)
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 0, p1 = 1, p2 = 2
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Parameter details
n
p1, p2
(Bar Code Size Specification Method)
(Size Specification)
0
USE_LIMITS
(Specifies ratio of bar code verti-
cal/horizontal directions)
p1: p2: Distribution ratio of vertical (p1) and horizontal (p2)
However, p1: p2 = 1 : 99 to 10:1 ( p1/p2 = 0.01 to 10)
1
USE_FIXED
p1: Number of lines (0, 3 to 90); p2: Number of columns (0, 1
(Specifies number of lines, and
number of columns in the bar
code.)
to 30)
However, p1 * p2 ≤ 928
If either p1 or p2 is set to 0, it indicates that that value is vari-
able.
Setting of the bar code size using this command specifies the general size. The size is automatically
corrected by other settings.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
ESC GS x S 1 n
[Name] Set PDF417 ECC (security level)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
29
x
S
1
n
n
n
78 53 31
120 83 49
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 8
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
-
[Initial Value]
n = 1
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Parameter details
• n: ECC level (0 to 8)
:
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-135
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS x S 2 n
[Name] Set PDF417 module X direction size
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
x
S
2
n
n
n
78 53 32
27
29 120 83 50
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 10
Slip
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 2
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Parameter details
• n : Sets the module X direction size (x-dim) (units: dots)
Specification using this command is recommended to be 2 ≤ n.
To use with n = 1, confirm by actual use.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
ESC GS x S 3 n
[Name] Set PDF417 module aspect ratio
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
29
x
S
3
n
n
n
78 53 33
120 83 51
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 10
Slip
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 3
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Parameter details
• n: Sets module aspect ratio (asp).
The module Y direction size is set to [x-dim * asp] by this command.
Specification using this command is recommended to be 2 ≤ n.
To use with n = 1, confirm by actual use.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-136
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS x D nL nH d1 d2 … dk
[Name] PDF417 bar code data setting
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
29
x
D
nL nH d1 d2
…
…
…
dk
dk
dk
78 44 nL nH d1 d2
120 68 nL nH d1 d2
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
0 ≤ nL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ nH ≤ 255
1 ≤ (nL + nH x 256) ≤ 1024
0 ≤ d ≤ 255, 1 ≤ k ≤ 1024
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Parameter details
• nL+nH×256: Bar code data count
• dk:
Bar code data (max. 1024 data)
When [nL+nH×256] is outside of the defined area, data of [nL+nH×256] bytes is received and dis-
carded.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
ESC GS x P
[Name] Print PDF417 bar code
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
x
P
78 50
27
29 120 80
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Prints bar code data.
If there is unprinted data in the line buffer, this command is executed after printing that data.
Therefore, it is not possible to print with other data in the same line (characters, bit images, bar
codes).
Also, if the following errors occur, this command is ignored.
• An error occurs when generating the bar code by the combination of bar code settings.
• When the generated bar code exceeds the printable PDF417 size.
• When the print data exceeds the currently set print region.
• Bar codes to be printed should always be confirmed through an actual printout.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Four bytes ignored
3-137
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS x I
[Name] Get PDF417 bar code expansion information
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
29
x
I
78 49
27
120 73
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
In printing bar codes with the current setting and the printing starting position using this command,
information such as the presence of errors is sent to the printer.
Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether printing is possible before actual printing, with this com-
mand.
If there is an error, the command is received and discarded even if the print command ESC GS x P
is sent.
Also, if the following errors occur, “Error” information is sent to the printer.
• When an error occurs when generating the bar code by the combination of bar code settings
• When the generated bar code exceeds the printable PDF417 size.
• When the print data exceeds the currently set print region.
Transmission format: <ESC> <GS> “x” “I” n
n
0
1
No
Error
<Slip>, <Validation>
Send <ESC> <GS> “x” “I” 1 (error)
3-138
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-10) Print Starting Trigger Control Command Details
This command is for models equipped with an expansion control function that page-controls the command in line units
by page-controlling the image buffer.
ESC GS g 0 m n
[Name] Print starting trigger
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
29
g
0
m
m
m
n
n
n
67 30
27
103 48
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
m = 0, n = 0
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Starts printing if there is unprinted data in the image buffer.
Transmission of this command is prohibited when in raster mode.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Six bytes ignored
ESC GS g 1 m n
[Name] Set print start timer
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
GS
1D
29
g
1
m
m
m
n
n
n
1B
27
67 31
103 49
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
m = 0, 0 ≤ n ≤ 255
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
See the models below.
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets the print starting timer specified by n x 10 msec.
The print starting timer starts measuring from the point where the reception of print data stops, up to
the set printing starting time.
When the set print starting time is reached, this starts printing if there is unprinted data in the image
buffer.
Transmission of this command is prohibited when in raster mode.
n
0
Operating Mode
Print start timer = default value
1 to 255
Print start timer = n x 10 msec
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-139
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-11) 2-dimensional Bar Codes QR Code Command Details
* QR code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE Incorporated.
This command prints 2-dimensional bar codes of QR code.
Commands for 2-dimensional bar codes QR code are separated into the following four functions.
1) Bar code type setting
2) Bar code data setting
(<ESC> <GS> “y” “S”)
(<ESC> <GS> “y” “D”)
3) Page mode setting (Reserved)
4) Bar code printing (<ESC> <GS> “y” “P”)
5) Get bar code expansion information
(<ESC> <GS> “y” “I”)
The details of the functions are outlined below.
1) Bar code type setting
These commands set the bar code type.
These are all set to default. Only use them if you wish to change them. (Refer to following details for settings.)
Cell
Alignment Pattern
Specify model using <ESC> <GS> “y” “S” “0.”
Currently supported models are model 1 and model 2. To improve tolerance to distortion when codes are large on
model 2, an alignment pattern has been added to the structure.
Specify the error correction level using <ESC> <GS> “y” “S” “1.”
It is possible to read QR code even part of the data is corrupted, using error correction.
If this level is raised, the bar code size is increased because there is more backup information.
Specify the size of the cell (one square region that composes the QR code) using <ESC> <GS> “y” “S” “2.”
The vertical and horizontal sizes for the QR code are equal length squares, but the size of the bar code image gener-
ated is determined by the cell size.
See Appendix 7 for details on the actual printed QR code size.
These are individual settings, so the following errors may occur even if there are no problems. In such cases, the bar
code will not be generated, and the (4) print command ((<ESC> <GS> “y” “P”) will be ignored, and an error code will
be returned with (5) get bar code expansion information.
• An error occurs when generating the bar code by the combination of settings.
• When the print data exceeds the currently set print region.
Therefore, it is recommended to use the (5) Get bar code expansion information command (<ESC> <GS> “y” “I”) as a
means for checking for these errors prior to printing.
3-140
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
2) Bar code data setting command
This command set the bar code print data.
There are four types of data types that can be set by the QR code. They are: numbers, alpha-numeric characters,
binary and Kanji characters. However, with these specifications, there are two data setting methods. They are: A
method that specifies that data along with the bar code data (data manual analysis); and a method that specifies only
the bar code data (data automatic analysis).
(3) Page mode setting command
This command is not used.
4) Bar code printing command
This command prints the bar codes based on the settings of (1) and (3).
5) Get bar code expansion information command
This command checks whether a bar code can be printed based on the settings of (1) to (3).
= Precautions When Using the Commands =
• For (1) to (3), the setting values are retained if the following operations are not applied.
• New setting command is sent.
• Initialize commands are sent (<ESC> @, <CAN>)
• Power is turned off.
• With regard to (2), when an error occurs in command transmission, the set data is cleared, and the command is in-
valid.
• With regard to (4) and (5), send as needed.
• Printing
• When printing, the horizontal tabs, absolute position specification, relative position specification, and position move-
ment using position alignment are valid.
• Upside down printing and 2-color printing are possible.
• Bar codes to be printed should always be confirmed through an actual printout.
3-141
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Below is a command transmission example.
(1) Bar code type setting
<ESC> <GS>“y”“S”“0” 1
<ESC> <GS>“y”“S”“1” 0
<ESC> <GS>“y”“S”“2” 3
: Set to model 1.
: Set error correction level to L.
: Set cell size to 3 dots.
2) Bar code data setting
• <ESC> <GS> “y” “D” “1” 0 20 0 “2005, January 1 (SAT)” <LF>
: Set bar code data (data automatic analysis)
• <ESC> <GS> “y” “D” “2” 10 1 4 0 “2005”“,” : Set bar code data (data manual analysis)
4 2 0 “Year” “,”
1 1 0 “1” “,”
4 2 0 “Month” “,”
1 1 0 “1” “,”
4 2 0 “Day” “,”
4 2 0 “(” “,”
2 3 0 “SAT” “,”
4 2 0 “)” “,”
3 1 0 <LF>
(3) Print bar code
To confirm printability using the current settings, confirm the bar code expansion information.
<ESC> <GS> “y” “I” : Confirms bar code expansion information.
<ESC> <GS> “y” “P” : Prints
3-142
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS y S 0 n
[Name] Set QR code model
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
GS
1D
y
S
0
n
n
n
1B
27
79 53 30
29 121 83 48
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 2
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 2
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets the model.
• Parameter details
n
1
2
Set model
Model 1
Model 2
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
ESC GS y S 1 n
[Name] Set QR code mistake correction level
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
29
Y
S
1
n
n
n
79 53 31
121 83 49
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 3
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 0
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets the error correction level.
• Parameter details
n
0
1
2
3
Error Correction Level
Error Correction Rate (%)
L
7
M
Q
H
15
25
30
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-143
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS y S 2 n
[Name] Set QR code cell size
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
y
S
2
n
n
n
79 53 32
27
29 121 83 50
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
1 ≤ n ≤ 8
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
-
[Initial Value]
n = 3
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets the cell size.
•
•
•
Parameter details
n: Cell size (Units: Dots)
Specification using this command is recommended to be 3 ≤ n.
To use with n = 1 and 2, confirm by actual use.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-144
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS y D 1 m nL nH d1 d2 … dk
[Name] QR code data setting (automatic setting)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
29
y
D
1
m
m
m
nL nH d1 d2
nL nH d1 d2
nL nH d1 d2
…
…
…
dk
dk
dk
79 44 31
121 68 49
27
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
m = 0
0 ≤ nL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ nH ≤ 255 1 ≤ nL + nH × 256 ≤ 7089 (k = nL + nH × 256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Automatically analyzes the bar code data type and sets the data.
•
•
•
•
Parameter details
nL+nH×256:
dk:
Bar code data byte count
Bar code data (max. 7089 bytes)
When using this command, the printer receives data of the number of bytes (k) specified by nL
and nH, automatically analyzes the data and sets that as the bar code data.
nL and nH specify the number of data bytes.
When processed as a Kanji character code, two bytes are one character.
If the parameter is outside of the defined area, the data for the amount of the counter is received
and discarded.
•
•
At that time, the bar code data is not cleared.
•
The command data storage region is shared with the manual setting command, so data is
updated each time either command is executed.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-145
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS y D 2 a m1 n1L n1H d11 d12 … d1k m2 n2L n2H d21 d22 … d2k ml … dlk
[Name] QR code data setting (manual setting)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
y
D
44
68
2
32
50
a
a
a
m1 n1L n1H d11 d12
m1 n1L n1H d11 d12
m1 n1L n1H d11 d12
…
…
…
d1k
d1k
d1k
79
Decimal
27
29 121
ASCII
m2 n2L n2H D21 d22
m2 n2L n2H D21 d22
m2 n2L n2H D21 d22
…
…
…
d2k
d2k
d2k
ml
ml
ml
…
…
…
dlk
dlk
dlk
Hexadecimal
Decimal
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
1 ≤ a ≤ 255
1 ≤ m ≤ 4
0 ≤ nL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ nH ≤ 255 1 ≤ nL + nH × 256 ≤ 7089 (k = nL + nH × 256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
1 ≤ l ≤ 255
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Specifies the bar code data type and sets the data.
•
•
•
•
•
Parameter details
: Block count
m : Input data type
nL + nH x 256
a
: Bar code data byte count
dk : Bar code data (max. 7089 bytes)
m
1
Data Type
Numbers
Data Defined Area (d)
“0” to “9”
2
English Language
Characters
“ ”, “$”, “%”, “*”, “+”, “-”, “.”, “/”, “:”,
“0” to “9”, “A” to “Z”
3
4
Binary
0x00 to 0xFF
Kanji characters
(Shift JIS)
0x8140 to 0x9FFC, 0xE040 to 0xEBBF
However, the lower 8 bits are 0x40 to 0x7E, 0x80 to 0xFC.
•
•
The printer receives the data type specified by m, based on the block count specified by a, and
the data of the number of bytes (k) specified by nL and nH, and sets that as the bar code data.
One block specified by a specifies m1 n1L n1H d11•••d1k (data type + data count + bar code
data), and by sending a multiple of these continuously, data types can be included in one bar
code.
•
•
It is possible to set a maximum of 255 blocks with one command transmission.
nL and nH specify the number of data bytes, so for Kanji characters, calculation is done using 1
character for two bytes.
•
•
If the parameter is outside of the defined area, the data for the amount of the counter is received
and discarded.
At that time, the bar code data is cleared.
The command data storage region is shared with the automatic setting command, so data is
updated each time either command is executed.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
3-146
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS y P
[Name] Print QR code
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
29
y
P
79 50
Decimal
27
121 80
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
This command prints the bar code data.
When this command is received, the printer prints unprinted data, if unprinted data remains in the
image buffer, then prints the bar code.
Margins of more than 4 cells are required around the QR code. The user must ensure the margins.
• Bar codes to be printed should always be confirmed through an actual printout.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Four bytes ignored
ESC GS y I
[Name] Get QR code expansion information
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
29
y
I
79 49
27
121 73
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
In expanding bar codes with the current setting using this command, information such as the size of
the generated image and errors is sent to the printer.
Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether printing is possible before actual printing, with this com-
mand.
If there is an error in the bar code expansion, the command is ignored even if the expansion com-
mand ESC GS y P is sent.
Also, if the following errors occur, “Error” information is sent to the printer.
• When an error occurs when generating the bar code by the combination of bar code settings
• When the generated bar code exceeds the printable size.
Transmission format: <ESC> <GS> “y” “I” n1 n2
Bar Code Information
n1 n2
0x0000
Error
0x0001 to 0xffff
Size of one side of generated bar code data (Units: Dots)
<Slip>, <Validation>
Send <ESC> <GS> “y” “I” 0 0 (error)
3-147
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-12) Page Function Command Details
ESC GS h 0 k m n
[Name] 180˚ inversion function
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
29
h
0
k
k
k
m
m
m
n
n
n
68 30
27
104 48
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ k ≤ 1, m = 0, n = 0
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets to make 180˚ inversion function valid/invalid.
180˚ Inversion Function
k
0
1
Invalid
Valid
<180˚ Inversion Function>
When the 180˚ inversion function is valid, it is executed by the 180˚ inversion trigger.
However, this function is executed on print data that fits in the image buffer length.
If print data is larger than the image buffer length, the 180˚ inversion function is ignored.
Also, when starting printing using anything other than the 180˚ inversion trigger, the 180˚ inversion
function is ignored.
This setting is not cleared by the ESC @, CAN commands.
180˚ Inversion Triggers
• Cutter Command:
• FF Command:
ESC d n
FF
• BM Detection Command:
• Print Startup Command:
• Raster Mode:
ESC d n, FF
ESC GS g 0 m n
When executing FF
Example of Use
*1) 180˚ Inversion Function Valid: ESC GS h 0 k m n (k=0x01, m=0x00, n=0x00)
2) Transmit print data: Print data (print length is within the length of the image buffer)
3) Trigger command transmission: ESC d n (cutter command is 180˚ inversion trigger)
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
(Note) When using this function, the data volume for one page should be within the printer’s
buffer length.
3-148
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC GS h 1 k m n
[Name] Water mark function
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
GS
1D
h
1
k
k
k
m
m
m
n
n
n
68 31
27
29 104 49
[Defined Area]
Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
0 ≤ k ≤ 2, 0 ≤ m ≤ 2, 1 ≤ n ≤ 255
Slip
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Sets to make water mark function valid/invalid.
Water Mark Function
k
0
1
Invalid
Valid
Prints one logo specified by n at the position centered in the horizontal and vertical
directions.
2
Valid
Repeatedly prints logo specified by n from leading edge of the page to the trailing end of the
page, at the position centered in the horizontal direction.
Set the forming method of the logo data to be printed as the water mark to make the image appropri-
ate as the water mark with this setting.
If the appropriate image is not possible with this setting, re-register after forming the logo data regis-
tered as the water mark as the appropriate data.
m
0
Water Mark Data Forming
Prints logo data specified n as it is.
1
Thins logo data specified n 25% in the printout.
Thins logo data specified n 12.5% in the printout.
2
Specify the registered logo as the water mark.
n
Logo Number
1 to 255
Registered logo number
If the specified logo number is not registered, the water mark will not be printed.
<Water Mark Function>
When the water mark inversion function is valid, it is printed by the water mark pinting trigger.
However, this function is executed on print data that fits in the image buffer length.
If print data is larger than the image buffer length, water mark printing is ignored.
Also, when starting printing using anything other than the water mark printing trigger, water mark
printing is ignored.
When in 2-color printing mode, this function is invalid.
This setting is not cleared by the ESC @, CAN commands.
Water Mark Printing Triggers
• Cutter Command
• FF Command
: ESC d n
: FF
• BM Detection Command : ESC d n, FF
• Print Startup Command
• Raster Mode
: ESC GS g 0 m n
: When executing FF
3-149
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Example of Use
1) Register logo to use as the water mark as logo #1.
2) Water mark function is valid.:
3) Transmit print data:
4) Trigger command transmission:
ESC GS h 1 k m n (k=0x02, m=0x01, n=0x01)
Print data (print length is within the length of the image buffer)
ESC d n (cutter command is water mark printing trigger)
<Slip>, <Validation>
Only setting is valid
Setting is valid after switching to thermal.
(Note) When using this function, the data volume for one page should be within the printer’s
buffer length.
3-150
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-13) Slip/Validation Function Command Details
ESC SI n
[Name] Set slip sensor
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
SI
n
n
n
1B 0F
27 15
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Three bytes ignored
ESC FF n
[Name] Slip/Validation Function
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC FF
n
n
n
1B 0C
27 12
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
2 ≤ n ≤ 5, 50 ≤ n ≤ 53, (“2” ≤ n ≤ “5”)
Validation
Thermal
Slip
2 ≤ n ≤ 5, 50 ≤ n ≤ 53, (“2” ≤ n ≤ “5”)
[Initial Value]
-
-
-
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Three bytes ignored
<Slip>
After printing data in the line buffer, the slip paper operation is executed according to the n value.
n
Slip Operation
2 to 5
Discharges paper toward the back (the forward direction)
50 to 53
<Validation>
After printing data in the line buffer, the validation printer operation is executed according to the n
value.
n
Slip Operation
2 to 5
Discharges paper toward the back (the forward direction)
50 to 53
3-151
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC VT m n
[Name] Sets slip paper discharge direction and discharge length
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC VT
1B 0B
27 11
m
m
m
n
n
n
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Four bytes ignored
ESC EM n m LF NUL
[Name] Set slip/validation automatic clamp
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
EM
19
n
n
n
M
M
M
LF NUL
0A
10
00
0
27
25
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
-
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
m = 0, 1, 48, 49
Validation
:
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
m = 2, 3, 50, 51
[Initial Value]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
-
n: MSW Setting
m = 0
Validation
:
n: MSW Setting
m = 0
[Function]
m
Function
0, 1, 48, 49 Sets the waiting time from inserting slip paper until the start of execution of automatic clamp
according to n.
n is the same as the MSW slip opening time setting (for details refer to the MSW settings for
each printer).
2, 3, 50, 51 Sets the waiting time from inserting validation paper until the start of execution of automatic
clamp according to n.
n is the same as the MSW validation opening time setting (for details refer to the MSW
settings for each printer).
<Thermal>
Only setting is valid. Setting is valid after switching to slip or validation.
3-152
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-14) Page Mode Command Details
FF
[Name] Batch printing of page data (valid only in page mode)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal 0C
Decimal 12
FF
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Refer to “Page Control Command.”
<Slip>, <Validation>
When in page mode, the printer batch prints page data expanded in the page region, then returns to
line mode.
After batch printing of the page mode, data in the page, the page print region and print direction are
all initialized.
Note that when the printer is in line mode, nothing functions.
3-153
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC n
[Name] Selects page mode
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
1B
n
6E
27 110
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Two bytes ignored
<Slip>, <Validation>
Shifts from line mode (default) to page mode.
This command is valid when input at the top of the line. Page mode expands print data to the page
coordinate region set by ESC * … and according to the rotation direction set by ESC T n, and prints
all the data using FF in the end.
In page mode, print data is OR expanded to the page region so you can be free to overlappingly
write characters and bit images and rotate characters.
In page mode, if print data + <LF> is set using the same method as line mode, the data will be auto-
matically rotated at the printer.
Page mode has the following restrictions.
(1) Print Data Expansion
In page mode, because data is expanded in normal dot increments, characters accompanying
half dots cannot be handled.
When page mode is entered, ANK fonts are automatically set to 5 x 9 (2P-1) fonts.
In page mode, the IBM block is changed to vertical 8 dot fonts.
Kanji characters (Kanji) cannot be printed.
When the character space is an odd number, 1 half dot is discarded.
Also, characters are expanded based on the base line, so vertical double tall expanded
characters are cut when the top portion is at the page top line, and if they are at the second
line, they sometimes can overlap the previous line.
For that reason, if vertical expanded characters are included in one line, add an extra <LF>
prior to the print data line to ensure print region to allow the vertical expanded character to be
printed.
(2) Paper feed command
In page mode, the paper feed command and line feed are executed as a movement of the
expanded position, according to dot units.
The 1 coordinate for the X direction is 0.159 mm (1 half-dot), and the 1 coordinate for the Y
direction is 0.176 mm (1 half-dot) as the units of the X and Y coordinates. The printing results
will not be doubled in the X and Y directions for 0˚/180˚ rotations and 90˚/270˚ rotations.
With 90˚/270˚ rotations, the amount of paper feed and the height of the characters are reduced.
The font horizontal expansion and horizontal movement amounts are increased.
For example, when using 1/6 inch line feed with 0˚ rotation, 24 half-dots x 0.176 mm = 4.224
mm. However, with 90˚/270˚ rotations, 24 half-dots x 0.159 mm = 3.816 mm. There is a
difference of 4.224 – 3.816 = 0.408 mm.
To rotate a check print of a determined form 90˚ or 270˚, create a program that considers this
difference.
(3)
• Setting Commands Received While in Page Mode
The following outlines three cases. (See each command for details.)
• Valid Command
• Commands that are valid when line mode is selected
• Ignored commands
Batch printing of page region data is executed by FF. After the FF, the printer returns to line mode.
When returning to line mode, all conditions such as print data in the print region, region coordinate
information, and rotation direction are cleared.
3-154
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC !
[Name] Select line mode (Default)
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
!
1B 21
27 33
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Two bytes ignored
<Slip>, <Validation>
Select line mode (Default)
When this command is executed in page mode, the printer returns to line mode without printing.
When returning to line mode, all conditions such as print data in the print region, region coordinate
information, and rotation direction are cleared.
3-155
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC * xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH
[Name] Set page mode print region
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
*
xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH
1B 2A xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH
27 42 xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
-
0 ≤ xL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ xH ≤ 2
0 ≤ yL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ yH ≤ 5
0 ≤ dxL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ dxH ≤ 2 (However, 0 ≠ dxL + dxH x 256) 1 ≤ dx ≤ 540 half-dots
0 ≤ dyL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ dyH ≤ 5 (However, 0 ≠ dyL + dyH × 256) 1 ≤ dy ≤ 1408 half-dots
Validation
:
0 ≤ xL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ xH ≤ 2
0 ≤ yL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ yH ≤ 5
0 ≤ dxL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ dxH ≤ 2 (However, 0 ≠ dxL + dxH x 256) 1 ≤ dx ≤ 540 half-dots
0 ≤ dyL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ dyH ≤ 5 (However, 0 ≠ dyL + dyH × 256) 1 ≤ dy ≤ 1408 half-dots
[Initial Value]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
-
xL = 0, xH = 0, yL = 0, yH = 0, dxL = 28, dxH = 2, dyL = 128, dyH = 5
(X0 = 0, Y0 = 0, dx = 540, dy = 1408)
Validation
:
xL = 0, xH = 0, yL = 0, yH = 0, dxL = 28, dxH = 2, dyL = 128, dyH = 5
(X0 = 0, Y0 = 0, dx = 540, dy = 1408)
[Function]
<Thermal>
The following commands are valid only when slip/validation have been selected. Their use is prohib-
ited when thermal has been selected.
<Slip>, <Validation>
Set page mode print region
Use the left edge coordinate of the current position when the printer enters page mode as (0,0), and
specify the starting point (X0, Y0) of the page region using xLxH,yLyH, and specify the length dx of
the X direction using dxL, dxH, and the length dY of the Y direction using dyL, dyH.
Current Positon(0,0)
(X0, Y0)
Dx
Paper Feed Direction
Dy
Print Region
Starting Point X0 = xL (xH x 256) dots
Starting Point Y0 = yL (yH x 256) dots
Length of Horizontal Direction Dx = dxL + (dxH x 256) dots
Length of Vertical Direction
Dy = dyL + (dyH x 256) dots
If the parameter is out of range, this command is invalid.
This command is stored even in line mode. However, the position when the printer enters page
mode is applied for the reference point (0,0).
Expansion of print data into the page is performed using the bottom edge of the characters as the
base line, so a print region higher than the minimum of 9 dots is necessary for the height direction of
the characters. (When using vertical double tall expanded characters, it is necessary to execute an
extra paper feed in advance.)
3-156
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC T n
[Name] Set page mode rotation direction
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
T
n
n
n
1B 54
27 84
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
0 ≤ n ≤ 3, 48 ≤ n ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “3”)
Validation
Thermal
Slip
0 ≤ n ≤ 3, 48 ≤ n ≤ 51, (“0” ≤ n ≤ “3”)
[Initial Value]
-
n = 0
n = 0
Validation
[Function]
<Thermal>
Three bytes ignored
<Slip>, <Validation>
Sets the rotation in page mode to the items in the table below, according to the n value.
Setting valid only when line mode.
n
Rotation Direction
0, 48
1, 49
2, 50
3, 51
0°
270°
180°
90°
n=2
180°Rotation
n=0
0°Rotation
n=1 or 4
270°Rotation
n=3
90°Rotation
1 2 3 4 5 • • •
A B C D E • • •
A B C D E • • •
1 2 3 4 5 • • •
<Genend Concept of Rotation Diection>
3-157
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-15) Station Selection Command Details
ESC + A n
[Name] Select printer station
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC
+
A
n
n
n
1B 2B 41
27 43 65
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
n = 0, 3, 4, “0”, “3”, “4”
n = 0, 3, 4, “0”, “3”, “4”
n = 0, 3, 4, “0”, “3”, “4”
n = 0
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
n = 0
Validation
n = 0
[Function]
n
Selects printer station
Selected Station
0, “0”
1, “1”
2, “2”
3, “3”
4, “4”
Selects Thermal Receipt Station
Reserved
Reserved
Selects Slip Station
Selects Validation Station
Switches to the printer station using this command after printing data in the line buffer.
Therefore, always append an LF to the print data just before this command.
<Slip>, <Validation>
When station is switched, conditions such as data in the page, the page print region, and the printing
direction are all initialized.
Command is ignored when page mode is selected.
3-158
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-16) Presenter Related Command Details
The following commands control the presenter functions.
The following commands are effective only on models equipped with a presenter.
ESC SYN 0 n
[Name] Execute presenter paper recovery
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC SYN
0
n
n
n
1B
27
16 30
22 48
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Four bytes ignored
ESC SYN 1 n
[Name] Set presenter paper automatic recovery function and automatic recovery time
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC SYN
1
n
n
n
1B
27
16 31
22 49
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Four bytes ignored
ESC SYN 3 n
[Name] Acquire presenter paper counter
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
ESC
1B
SYN
3
n
n
n
16 33
22 51
Decimal
27
[Defined Area] Thermal
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Slip
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Four bytes ignored
3-159
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
ESC SYN 4 n
[Name] Initialize presenter paper counter
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC SYN
4
4
n
n
n
1B
27
16
22 52
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Validation
Thermal
Slip
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
Four bytes ignored
3-160
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3-17) MICR Related Command Details
The following commands control MICR functions.
The following commands are effective only on models equipped with MICR.
ESC FS M m n
[Name] MICR function
[Code] ASCII
Hexadecimal
Decimal
ESC FS
M
m
m
m
n
n
n
1B 1C 4D
27 28 77
[Defined Area]
Thermal
Slip
:
:
-
48 ≤ m ≤ 50 (“0” ≤ m ≤ “2”)
n = 48, 49
Validation
Thermal
Slip
:
:
:
:
-
-
-
-
[Initial Value]
[Function]
Validation
<Thermal>, <Validation>
Five bytes ignored
<Slip>
Performs operations on inserted slip paper (cleaning paper).
Note that if slip paper has been inserted, and already is targeted for printing, that slip paper is dis-
charged to the back (the forward direction), and operations are performed on the newly inserted slip
paper (cleaning paper).
m
Function
48
Reads format specified by n, and returns read character string.
n=48 • • • E13B read format
n=49 • • • CMC7 read format
Reading successful • • • ESC FS M 0 n, read character string LF NUL
Reading failed • • • ESC FS M 0 n, LF NUL
49
Reads with format specified by n, and returns read character string.
If no slip paper has been inserted, an empty character is returned immediately that indicates
no insertion.
n=48 • • • E13B read format
n=49 • • • CMC7 read format
Reading successful • • • ESC FS M 1 n, read character string LF NUL
Reading failed • • • ESC FS M 1 n, LF NUL
Empty character string • • • ESC FS M 1 n LF NUL
50
Performs cleaning of the conveyance rollers and magnetic head by inserted cleaning paper.
n is 48 or 49.
In page mode, five bytes ignored.
3-161
STAR Line Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
E13B Support Table
Type
ASCII
Numbers
0 to 9
SYMBOL1
SYMBOL2
SYMBOL3
SYMBOL4
T
A
O
D
Hex
30 to 39
48 to 57
54
84
41
65
4F
79
44
68
Decimal
CMC7 Support Table
Type
ASCII
Numbers
0 to 9
S I
/
S II
#
S III
=
S IV
>
S V
^
Hex
30 to 39
48 to 57
2F
47
23
35
3D
61
3E
62
5F
94
Decimal
3-162
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
4. CHARACTER CODE TABLES
Character Code Specifications References
4-1
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
5. APPENDIX
5-1) Appendix 1: Bar Code Specification Details <Thermal>
Refer to the dedicated manuals for characteristics and methods of use for each bar code symbol.
This section describes precautions and methods for setting when printing with the printer.
Bar code widths are set for each bar code according to the mode. The following describes each mode and the dot
counts.
The user must ensure the specified printing position and quiet zone at the position where the bar code begins.
5-1-1) Code 39
Code 39 represents numbers 0 to 9 and the letters of the alphabet from A to Z.
These are the symbols most frequently used today in industry.
1. Length of characters in each mode
Items
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4
Mode 5
3 Dots
Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8
Mode 9
4 Dots
Narrow Element
Width
2 Dots
3 Dots
4 Dots
2 Dots
4 Dots
2 Dots
3 Dots
Wide Element Width
Ratio
6 Dots
1:3
9 Dots
1:3
12 Dots 5 Dots
8 Dots
1:2.7
10 Dots 4 Dots
6 Dots
1:2
8 Dots
1:2
1:3
1:2.5
1:2.5
1:2
Character Spacing
2 Dots
3 Dots
6mm
4 Dots
8mm
2 Dots
3 Dots
4 Dots
2 Dots
3 Dots
4 Dots
Length of 1 Character 4mm
3.625mm 5.625mm 7.25mm 3.25mm 4.875mm 6.5mm
(*) The length of 1 character includes the character spacing.
2. Regulations
The start and stop bar code (*) in Code 39 are automatically inserted.
5-1-2) Interleaved 2 of 5
Interleaved 2 of 5 represents numbers 0 to 9.
Higher density of characters is possible and with JIS and EAN, and priting to cardboard for distribution has been stan-
dardized.
1) Narrow element width and length of symbols per 2 characters
Items
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8 Mode 9
Narrow Element Width
Wide Element Width
Ratio
2 Dots
5 Dots
1:2.5
4 Dots
6 Dots
2 Dots
4 Dots
8 Dots
1:2
6 Dots
12 Dots 6 Dots
1:2 1:3
10.5mm 4.5mm
2 Dots
3 Dots
9 Dots
1:3
4 Dots
12 Dots
1:3
10 Dots 15 Dots 4 Dots
1:2.5
8mm
1:2.5
1:2
Length of 1 Character
4mm
12mm
3.5mm
7mm
6.75mm 9mm
2. Regulations
• By selecting interleaved 2 of 5 bar code symbols, start and stop patterns are automatically inserted.
• When the bar code data digit count is odd, a zero is added to the highest value digit.
• Details conform to standards for AIM, USS-12/5, ANSI and JIS x 0502.
5-1
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
5-1-3) JAN/EAN/UPC
Used numbers, not only the bar code symbols, are controlled using JAN, EAN and UPC as shared common commer-
cial codes.
Mainly, they are used for supermarkets such as shops and grocery stores.
1. Each mode and bar code width
Items
Mode 1
2 Dots
Mode 2
3 Dots
Mode 3
4 Dots
Module Width
Bar Code Width
(*)
JAN/EAN-8
16.75mm
25.125mm
33.5mm
JAN/EAN-13
UPC-A
23.75mm
23.75mm
12.75mm
35.625mm
35.625mm
19.125mm
47.5mm
47.5mm
25.5mm
UPC-E
(*) Includes the guard bar (left/right/center) but not the white space.
2. Regulations
• JAN/EAN/-8
Data is in 7 or 8 digits. The command is ignored for others.
The check digit uses a modulus weight of 10/3 and is automatically applied.
When the calculated value and the numerical value of the 8th digit differ, the calculated value has priority.
• JAN/EAN-13
Data is in 12 or 13 digits. The command is ignored for others.
The check digit uses a modulus weight of 10/3 and is automatically applied.
When the calculated value and the numerical value of the 13th digit differ, the calculated value has priority.
• UPC-A
Data is in 11 or 12 digits. The command is ignored for others.
The check digit uses a modulus weight of 10/3 and is automatically applied.
When the calculated value and the numerical value of the 12th digit differ, the calculated value has priority.
• UPC-A
Data is in 11 or 12 digits. The command is ignored for others.
The check digit uses a modulus weight of 10/3 and is automatically applied.
When the calculated value and the numerical value of the 12th digit differ, the calculated value has priority.
Data conversion to rectangles is automatic.
Data that cannot be shortened is processed as invalid data.
5-2
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
5-1-4) Code 128
These are bar code symbols that can print ASCII 128 characters.
For that reason, use thereof is increasing.
1. Each module and module width
Items
Mode 1
2 Dots
Mode 2
3 Dots
Mode 3
4 Dots
5.5mm
Module Width
Length of 1 Character (*)
(*) Start and stob bars not included.
2.75mm
4.125mm
2. Regulations
When using LF with the command, control codes are not sent by the host PC, so the control codes are sent as data,
as shown below.
• When sending the following data, it is represented by a 2-character set.
% (25H) represented by %0 (25H 30H).
Control codes (00H to 1FH) represented by 40H to 5FH applied behind %.
Control code (7FH) represented by %5 (25H 35H).
Function codes represent 1 to 4 (31H to 34H) applied behind %.
Start codes represent 6 to 8 (36H to 38H) applied behind %.
• Stop code (SC)/Check character (CK) are automatically applied.
• When start code is omitted:
Uses START C when more than 4 digits continue after header.
Uses START A when initial data other than numbers are the control code.
Uses START B for other cases.
5-3
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
3.
2-Character set code table
<Control Codes>
<Control Codes>
<Control Codes>
Code
Format
Code
Format
NUL 00H
SOH 01H
STX 02H
ETX 03H
EOT 04H
ENQ 05H
ACK 06H
BEL 07H
BS 08H
%@ 25H 40H
%A 25H 41H
%B 25H 42H
%C 25H 43H
%D 25H 44H
%E 25H 45H
%F 25H 46H
%G 25H 47H
%H 25H 48H
%I 25H 49H
%J 25H 4AH
%K 25H 4BH
%L 25H 4CH
%M 25H 4DH
%N 25H 4EH
%O 25H 4FH
%P 25H 50H
%Q 25H 51H
%R 25H 52H
%S 25H 53H
%T 25H 54H
%U 25H 55H
%V 25H 56H
%W 25H 57H
%X 25H 58H
%Y 25H 59H
%Z 25H 5AH
%[ 25H 5BH
%\ 25H 5CH
%] 25H 5DH
%^ 25H 5EH
%_ 25H 5FH
%5 25H 35H
% 25H
%0 25H 30H
<Function Codes>
Code
FNC1
FNC2
FNC3
FNC4
Format
*
*
*
*
%1 25H 31H
%2 25H 32H
%3 25H 33H
%4 25H 34H
HT 09H
LF 0AH
VT 0BH
FF 0CH
CR 0DH
SO 0EH
SI 0FH
<Start Codes>
Code
Format
START A
START B
START C
%6 25H 36H
%7 25H 37H
%8 25H 38H
*
*
*
DLE 10H
DC1 11H
DC2 12H
DC3 13H
DC4 14H
NAK 15H
SYN 16H
ETB 17H
CAN 18H
EM 19H
SUB 1AH
ESC 1BH
FS 1CH
GS 1DH
RS 1EH
US 1FH
DEL 7FH
5-4
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
5-1-5) Code 93
1. Each mode and module width
Items
Mode 1
2 Dots
Mode 2
3 Dots
Mode 3
4 Dots
4.5mm
Module Width
Length of 1 Character (*)
(*) Start and stob bars not included.
2.25mm
3.375mm
2. Regulations
• Start/stop codes are automatically applied.
• Check character (C, K) is automatically applied.
• 2 character set expression conforms to Code 128.
However, items marked with a star are codes that can only be used with Code 128, and not with Code 93.
5-1-6) NW7 (CODERBAR)
NW7 normally uses either A through D as the start/stop codes and represents special symbols (- (minus sign)/$ (dollar
sign)/: (colon)// (slash)/. (period)/+ (plus sign) between 0 to 9.
These are used as carrier package marking bar codes, DPE (photo prints) and for medical related industries (USA).
1. Length of characters in each mode
Items
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
Mode 8
Mode 9
Narrow Element Width
Wide Element Width
Ratio
2
6
3
9
4
12
1:3
4
2
5
3
8
4
10
2
4
3
6
4
8
1:3
2
1:3
3
1:2.5
2
1:2.7
3
1:2.5
4
1:2
2
1:2
3
1:2
4
Character Spacing
(Dots)
Length of 1 Character
(Normally mm)
3
4.5
6
7
2.75
4.25
5.5
2.5
3.75
5
3.5
5.25
3.125
5.125
6.25
2.75
4.125
5.5
(Width mm)
• With NW7, lengths differ because narrow elements and wide elements are included according to the characters.
• Normal characters (narrow: 5, wide: 2) and numbers (0 to 9), - and $
• Wide characters (narrow: 4, wide: 3) :,/,.,+, A to D
• Character spaces are included in 1 character length.
5-5
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
5-2) Appendix 2 – Status Specifications <Shared>
This function is valid only when using an interface capable of bi-directional data communications.
Refer to your printer’s product specification manual to verify if the interface cable on the printer you use is capable of
bi-directional data communications.
5-2-1) ENQ Command Status
This status is the one the printer transmits using the ENQ command.
Bit
Contents
Status
By model
HSP7000
“0”
Open
“1”
Closed
Occurs
Empty
-
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Compulsion SW
○
○
○
-
Reception Buffer Overflow
Reception Buffer Empty
Fixed at “0”
Does not occur
Has Data
Paper end
Paper
No
No paper
Yes
○
○
○
○
Other Errors
Framing Error
No
Yes
Parity Error
No
Yes
• Reception over-flow errors/Framing errors/Parity errors
These errors are after holding the error and using this command to inquire the status and the error status is sent.
• Compulsion SW
When the conversion switch is ON, Bit 7 = 1.
• Other Errors
Indicates non-recoverable errors and cover open errors.
5-2-2) EOT Command Status
This status is the one the printer transmits using the EOT command.
Bit
Contents
Status
By model
HSP7000
“0”
“1”
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Presenter Paper Jam Error
Paper Near-end (Outer Side)
Fixed at “1”
No
Yes
No paper
-
×
×
-
Paper
Paper end
Paper
Paper
No
No paper
No paper
Yes
○
○
○
-
Paper Near-end (Inner Side)
BM Error
Fixed at “0”
-
• BM Error
On models that use a common PE and BM sensor, if a continuous error is detected beyond a determined amount, it
indicates not a black mark error, but a paper out error.
5-6
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
5-2-3) Automatic Status
Automatic status is a group of states that are automatically returned from the printer to the host when the printer’s sta-
tus has changed.Automatic status is composed of “Header – 1,” “Header – 2” and “plurality of bytes of the printer sta-
tus and is continuously returned to the host.The host always uses an identifying method to identify the data for every
byte received.
(It is possible that Xon/Xoff codes are exceptionally mixed in the auto status in the Xon/Xoff mode (when using a serial
I/F), so it is necessary to consider that on the receiving side.))
The valid/invalid conditions of the automatic status abide by the DIPSW settings for the initial values.
It is possible to change the conditions using the ESC RS a n command after turning ON the power.
Also, it is possible to get the automatic status using the ESC ACK SOH command, regardless of the valid/invalid con-
ditions.
(1)
Header -1
Header – 1 is the 1 byte length information transmitted at the head of the automatic status.
The table below shows the composition of the Header -1.Header – 1 represents the entire status transmission byte
count, including Header – 1, using bit 1 to bit 3 and bit 5. The host gets the transmission byte information and always
receives the status data for that amount transmission bytes. For reference, the table below shows the relationship of
actual transmission bytes and the Header – 1. Because the bit 0 that indicates that this is the Header – 1 is normally 1
(the second byte and beyond is 0), to detect the Header – 1, it is acceptable to verify that bit 0 is 1 and bit 4 = 0 for this
data. Note that bit 6 is for future expansion and is ignored in host-side processes.
<Header -1 (First Byte)>
Bit
Contents
Status
By model
HSP7000
“0”
“1”
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Fixed at “0”
-
-
-
-
Reserved (Fixed at 0)
Printer Status Byte Count
Fixed at “0”
○
-
-
Printer Status Byte Count
Printer Status Byte Count
Printer Status Byte Count
Fixed at “1”
○
○
○
-
-
Actual transmission byte count and header – 1 table
Transmission Byte Count n (7 ≤ n ≤ 15)
Header -1
7
00001111B (0F Hex)
00100001B (21 Hex)
00100011B (23 Hex)
00100101B (25 Hex)
00100111B (27 Hex)
00101001B (29 Hex)
00101011B (2B Hex)
00101101B (2D Hex)
00101111B (2F Hex)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5-7
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
(2)
Header -2
Header -2 is the 1 byte length information transmitted from the second byte of the automatic status. The table below
shows the composition of the Header -2.
Header -2 represents the automatic status version (called automatic status version below) using bit 1 to bit 3 and bit 5.
For reference, the table below shows the relationship of actual version bytes and the Header -2. The automatic status
version will be used as new information is added to the printer status bit positions that were empty, by adding new
functions in the future.
When the host does not control the automatic status version, it is acceptable to ignore Header – 2 received.
<Header -2 (Second Byte)>
Bit
Contents
Status
By model
HSP7000
“0”
“1”
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ASB Status Expansion
Version No.
No Expansion
Expansion
-
-
○
○
-
Version No.
Fixed at “0”
-
Version No.
○
○
○
-
Version No.
Version No.
Fixed at “0”
-
Actual automatic status version and header -2 table
Version No. n
Header -2
00000010B (02 Hex)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
•
00000100B (04 Hex)
00000110B (06 Hex)
00001000B (08 Hex)
00001010B (0A Hex)
00001100B (0C Hex)
00001110B (0E Hex)
00100000B (20 Hex)
00100010B (22 Hex)
•
•
•
•
•
30
31
01101100B (6C Hex)
01101110B (6E Hex)
Printer Status Version
Model Name
HSP7000
Version No.
3(06 Hex)
Status
Up to printer status 7 (9th byte) loaded
5-8
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
(3)
Printer Status
Printer status is the status of the printer sent from the 3rd byte of the automatic status.
For the printer status, (the number of bytes added in Header -1 minus two) is returned.
Printer status is always updated for new information. (No log exists.)
The following shows the composition of the status.
<Printer status 1 Printer status (Third Byte)>
Bit
Contents
Status
By model
HSP7000
“0”
“1”
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Fixed at “0”
-
-
OFFLINE By Switch Input
Cover Status
No
Occurs
Open
-
×
○
-
Closed
Fixed at “0”
ONLINE/OFFLINE Status
Compulsion SW
ETB Command
Fixed at “0”
ONLINE
Open
OFFLINE
Closed
Executed
-
○
○
○
-
Not Executed
• ETB Command
Cleared when received at the host (by clearing bit 1 to 0, automatic status is not targeted to occur).
<Printer status 2 Error Information (Fourth Byte)>
Bit
Contents
Status
By model
HSP7000
“0”
“1”
-
-
7
6
Fixed at “0”
Stopped by high head
temperature
○
Not stopped
No
Stopped
○
-
5
4
3
2
1
0
Non-recoverable Error
Fixed at “0”
Yes
-
○
○
-
Auto-cutter Error
Mechanical Error
Not Used (Fixed at “0”)
Fixed at “0”
No
No
Yes
Yes
-
-
<Printer status 3 Error Information (Fifth Byte)>
Bit
Contents
Status
By model
HSP7000
“0”
“1”
-
7
6
Fixed at “0”
-
Reception Buffer Overflow
Does not occur
No
Occurs
○
x
Command Error (in Page
Mode)
5
Yes
4
3
2
1
0
Fixed at “0”
-
-
○
×
×
-
BM Error
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Presenter Paper Jam Error
Head Up Error
Fixed at “0”
• Reception Buffer Overflow
Cleared to 0 when returned to the host.
• Command Error (in Page Mode)
Command errors cleared to 0 when returned to the host.
• BM Error
On models that use a common PE and BM sensor, if a continuous error is detected beyond a determined amount, it
indicates not a black mark error, but a paper out error.
5-9
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
<Printer status 4 Sensor Information (Sixth Byte)>
Bit
Contents
Status
By model
HSP7000
“0”
“1”
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Fixed at “0”
-
-
-
-
Not Used (Fixed at “0”)
Not Used (Fixed at “0”)
Fixed at “0”
-
-
-
Paper end
Paper
Paper
Paper
No paper
No paper
No paper
-
○
○
×
-
Paper Near-end (Inner Side)
Paper Near-end (Outer Side)
Fixed at “0”
<Printer status 5 Sensor Information (Seventh Byte)>
Bit
Contents
Status
By model
HSP7000
“0”
“1”
-
7
6
Fixed at “0”
-
Slip/Validation
○
Condition
Slip/Validation
○
5
Condition
4
3
2
Fixed at “0”
-
-
Slip BOF Detector
Slip TOF Detector
Slip COF Detector
Presenter Paper Detector
Stack Sensor Paper Detector
Peeling Sensor Paper Detector
Slip TOF Detector
Fixed at “0”
Paper
Paper
No paper
No paper
No paper
Paper
○
×
○
×
×
×
○
-
Paper
1
No paper
No paper
No paper
Paper
Paper
Paper
No paper
-
0
Slip/Validation Condition Support Table
Bit 6
Bit 5
Condition
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Slip Paper (MICR Target)
Slip Paper (Print Target)
Validation Paper (Print Target)
No paper
5-10
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
<Printer status 6 ETB Counter (Eighth Byte)>
Bit
Contents
Status
By model
HSP7000
“0”
“1”
-
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Fixed at “0”
-
○
○
-
ETB Counter Bit-4
ETB Counter Bit-3
Fixed at “0”
-
-
ETB Counter Bit-2
ETB Counter Bit-1
ETB Counter Bit-0
Fixed at “0”
○
○
○
-
(*) ETB Counter
This counter is the 5 bit ETB counter.
(It counts from 0 to 31.When ther counter overflows, it counts up from 31 to 0.))
This counter is incremented by 1 using the <ETB> command.
The ETB counter is initialized by the following commands. When doing so, ASB ETB status is cleared.
However, when initializing the ETB counter, ASB is not transmitted.
<ETB Counter Initialization Commands>
• <ESC><RS> E n
: ETB Counter Initialization
• <CAN> : Cancel print data and initialize commands
<Printer status 7 Position for Presenter Paper (Ninth Byte)>
Bit
Contents
Status
By model
HSP7000
“0”
“1”
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Fixed at “0”
-
-
-
-
-
Not Used (Fixed at “0”)
Not Used (Fixed at “0”)
Fixed at “0”
×
×
-
Presenter Paper Position
Presenter Paper Position
Presenter Paper Position
Fixed at “0”
×
×
×
-
-
(4) <Note>
Do not use ENQ, EOT, ESC, ACK and SOH when automatic status is valid.Invalidate the automatic status in advance
using the DIPSW (memory switch) or the ESC RS a n command to query these.
(5) Status identification method
Command/Functions
Status
bit 7
bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
XON
0
0
*
0
0
*
0
0
*
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
*
0
0
*
0
1
*
1
1
*
XOFF
ENQ
EOT
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
1
0
ASB (Header -1)
ASB (Other than Header -1)
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0 = fixed at “0” bits/1 = fixed at “1” bits/* = variable bits.
5-11
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
5-2-4) Printer Status Transmission Specification when using Ethernet and Wireless LAN
Interfaces
The following explains the printer status transmission specification when using Ethernet and wireless LAN interfaces.
1)
Transmission format:
• When transmitting only STAR ASB:
STAR ASB (Second Byte Bit-7=1) + Length (Length = 0x0000)
• When transmitting printer status other than STAR ASB:
STAR ASB (Second Byte Bit-7=1) + Length + Status Data
<Length Details>
• 2 byte value indicating status data byte count (0x0000 ≤ Length ≤ 0x0200)
• When the status data is 10 bytes: Length = 0x000a
• When transmitting only STAR ASB: Add Length = 0x0000
• When Star ASB Second byte Bit-7, and Length is added, Bit-7 = 1 is set.
For status analysis, the total byte count of ASB is detected using the first byte of Star ASB, and whether length is
added with the second byte Bit-7 of Star ASB is detected. By getting the byte count of subsequent status data using
the length, the status can be analyzed.
2)
Status Data Transmission Format:
Status Type + Delimiter 1 + Data Type + Status Length + Printer Status + Delimiter 2
(1) Status Type (2byte or 4byte)
• First and second bytes
Indicate a factor of printer status occurring.
• “00”:
Reserved
• “01” to “09”:
• “10” to “49”:
• “50” to “59”:
• “60” to “99”:
• “A0”:
Star real-time status request command
STAR Status Request Command
Reserved
Reserved
MICR Function Command
• “A1” to “FF”: Reserved
• Third and fourth bytes
If the factor is the command, indicates the n parameter of the command.
If there is no n parameter, the third and fourth bytes can be omitted.
<Ex.> If n = 0x31 with the ESC SYN 3 n command, the third and fourth bytes are “31.”
(2) Delimiter 1 (1 Byte)
Sends “:”.
(3) Data Type (1byte)
Indicates the data type of the printer status, and sends “B” (binary type).
(4) Status Length (2byte)
2 byte value indicating byte count of printer status
5-12
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
(5) Printer status (variable)
Status sent by printer
The content of the status differs according to the cause.
Refer to Commands That are Factors, and Automatic Status for details on the content of the status.
(6) Delimiter 2 (1 byte)
Sends “;”.
3)
Status transmission specifications list
Length
Status Data
Status Generating
Factors
STAR
ASB
Status Type
Delimiter
Data
Status
Printer
Status
Delimiter
2
First and
Third and
1
Type
Length
Second
Bytes
Fourth Bytes
n Parameter
--
Factors
--
ASB
Auto Status
ASB
ASB
ASB
ASB
ASB
0x0000
0x0000
0x0008
0x0008
0x0011
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
ESC ACK SOH
--
--
--
--
--
Printer Status Request
ENQ
“01”
“02”
“13”
Omitted
Omitted
“:”
“:”
“:”
“B”
“B”
“B”
0x0001
0x0001
0x0008
Status
Status
Status
“;”
“;”
“;”
Printer Status Request
EOT
Printer Status Request
ESC SYN 3 n
“00” ≤ n ≤
“01”
Presenter Counter
Request
“30” ≤ n ≤
“31”
ESC GS x I
ASB
ASB
ASB
0x000C
0x000D
“16”
“19”
“A0”
Omitted
“:”
“:”
“:”
“B”
“B”
“B”
0x0005
0x0006
Status
Status
Status
“;”
“;”
“;”
PDF417 Information
Request
ESC GS y I
Omitted
QR Code Information
Request
Variable
Length
“30” ≤ n ≤ “31”
Variable
Length
ESC FS M m n
MICR Function
5-13
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
5-3)
Appendix 3 – Blank Code Page Configuration <Thermal>
Blank code pages are character code tables that are empty from character code 80H to FFH. They can be specified
using the command below.
• ESC GS t n (n = 255)
Also, it is possible to write data to the blank code page area using the command below.
• ESC GS = …..
When registering data, Font A and Font B data must be registered as a set.
1. Example configuration of Font A data. (12 x 24 font)
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
d1
d3
d2
d4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
d5
d6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
d7
d8
d9
d10
d12
d14
d16
d18
d20
d22
d24
d26
d28
d30
d32
d34
d36
d38
d40
d42
d44
d46
d48
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
d11
d13
d15
d17
d19
d21
d23
d25
d27
d29
d31
d33
d35
d37
d39
d41
d43
d45
d47
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fig. A-1 12 x 24 Font
5-14
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
2. Example configuration of Font B data. (9 x 24 font)
Fig. A-2 9 x 24 Font
MSB
0
MSB
LSB
LSB
d1
d3
d2
d4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
d5
d6
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
d7
d8
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
d9
d10
d12
d14
d16
d18
d20
d22
d24
d26
d28
d30
d32
d34
d36
d38
d40
d42
d44
d46
d48
0
•
•
•
d11
d13
d15
d17
d19
d21
d23
d25
d27
d29
d31
d33
d35
d37
d39
d41
d43
d45
d47
0
0
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
0
•
•
•
•
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
5-15
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
5-4) Appendix 4: QR Code Maximum Input Character Count in Each Verson <Thermal>
1) Model 1 Versions and Maximum Input Character Count
Version
Number of
Cells on One
Side
Error
Correction
Numbers
English
Language
Characters
Binary
Kanji
Character
Level
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
1
21
25
29
33
37
41
45
49
53
57
61
65
69
73
40
33
25
16
81
66
52
33
24
20
15
10
49
40
31
20
79
60
49
31
113
84
69
46
154
116
95
17
14
11
7
34
28
22
14
55
42
34
22
78
58
48
32
106
80
10
8
6
4
20
17
13
8
33
25
20
13
48
35
29
19
65
49
40
27
82
64
51
34
103
80
65
43
126
97
77
2
3
131
100
81
52
4
186
138
114
76
5
253
191
157
105
321
249
201
133
402
311
253
167
493
378
301
203
585
441
369
239
690
526
433
291
800
608
493
342
915
694
579
390
1030
790
656
454
1167
877
738
498
66
44
134
104
84
63
6
194
151
122
81
56
7
244
188
154
101
299
229
183
123
354
267
223
145
418
319
262
176
485
368
299
207
555
421
351
236
624
479
398
275
707
531
447
302
168
130
106
70
206
158
126
85
8
52
9
244
184
154
100
287
219
180
121
333
253
205
142
381
289
241
162
429
329
273
189
486
365
307
207
150
113
94
61
10
11
12
13
14
177
135
111
74
205
156
126
87
234
178
148
100
264
202
168
116
299
225
189
127
M
Q
H
5-16
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
2) Model 2 Versions and Maximum Input Character Count
Version
Number of
Cells on One
Side
Error
Correction
Numbers
English
Language
Characters
Binary
Kanji
Character
Level
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
1
21
25
29
33
37
41
45
49
53
57
61
65
69
73
77
41
34
27
17
77
63
48
34
25
20
16
10
47
38
29
20
77
61
47
35
114
90
67
50
154
122
87
17
14
11
7
32
26
20
14
53
42
32
24
78
62
46
34
106
84
10
8
7
4
20
16
12
8
32
26
20
15
48
38
28
21
65
52
37
27
82
65
45
36
95
75
53
39
118
93
66
52
141
111
80
2
3
127
101
77
58
4
187
149
111
82
5
255
202
144
106
322
255
178
139
370
293
207
154
461
365
259
202
552
432
312
235
652
513
364
288
772
604
427
331
883
691
489
374
1022
796
580
427
1101
871
621
468
1250
991
703
530
60
44
134
106
74
64
6
195
154
108
84
224
178
125
93
58
7
154
122
86
64
8
279
221
157
122
335
262
189
143
395
311
221
174
468
366
259
200
535
419
296
227
619
483
352
259
667
528
376
283
758
600
426
321
192
152
108
84
230
180
130
98
9
60
10
11
12
13
14
15
271
213
151
119
321
251
177
137
367
287
203
155
425
331
241
177
458
362
258
194
520
412
292
220
167
131
93
74
198
155
109
85
226
177
125
96
262
204
149
109
282
223
159
120
320
254
180
136
5-17
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Version
16
Number of
Cells on One
Side
Error
Correction
Numbers
English
Language
Characters
Binary
Kanji
Character
Level
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
81
1408
1082
775
854
656
470
365
938
734
531
408
1046
816
574
452
1153
909
644
493
1249
970
702
557
586
450
322
250
644
504
364
280
718
560
394
310
792
624
442
338
858
666
482
382
929
711
509
403
1003
779
565
439
1091
857
611
361
277
198
154
397
310
224
173
442
345
243
191
488
384
272
208
528
410
297
235
572
438
314
248
618
480
348
270
672
528
376
284
721
561
407
315
784
614
440
330
842
652
462
365
902
692
496
385
940
732
534
405
1002
778
559
430
1066
843
604
457
602
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
85
1548
1212
876
674
89
1725
1346
948
746
93
1903
1500
1063
813
2061
1600
1159
919
2232
1708
1224
969
97
101
105
109
113
117
121
125
129
133
137
1352
1035
742
587
2409
1872
1358
1056
2620
2059
1468
1108
2812
2188
1588
1228
3057
2395
1718
1286
3283
2544
1804
1425
3514
2701
1933
1501
3669
2857
2085
1581
3909
3035
2181
1677
4158
3289
2358
1782
1460
1134
823
640
1588
1248
890
672
461
1171
911
661
511
1704
1326
963
744
1853
1451
1041
779
1990
1542
1094
864
2132
1637
1172
910
2223
1732
1263
958
2369
1839
1322
1016
2520
1994
1429
1080
1273
997
715
535
1367
1059
751
593
1465
1125
805
625
1528
1190
868
658
1628
1264
908
698
1732
1370
982
742
5-18
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Version
31
Number of
Cells on One
Side
Error
Correction
Numbers
English
Language
Characters
Binary
Kanji
Character
Level
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
141
145
149
153
157
161
165
169
173
177
4417
3486
2473
1897
4686
3693
2670
2022
4965
3909
2805
2157
5253
4134
2949
2301
5529
4343
3081
2361
5836
4588
3244
2524
6153
4775
3417
2625
6479
5039
3599
2735
6743
5313
3791
2927
7089
5596
3993
3057
2677
2113
1499
1150
2840
2238
1618
1226
3009
2369
1700
1307
3183
2506
1787
1394
3351
2632
1867
1431
3537
2780
1966
1530
3729
2894
2071
1591
3927
3054
2181
1658
4087
3220
2298
1774
4296
3391
2420
1852
1840
1452
1030
790
1952
1538
1112
842
2068
1628
1168
898
2188
1722
1228
958
1132
894
634
486
1201
947
684
518
1273
1002
719
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
553
1347
1060
756
590
2303
1809
1283
983
1417
1113
790
605
2431
1911
1351
1051
2563
1989
1423
1093
2699
2099
1499
1139
2809
2213
1579
1219
2953
2331
1663
1273
1496
1176
832
647
1577
1224
876
673
1661
1292
923
M
Q
H
L
M
Q
H
L
701
1729
1362
972
750
1817
1435
1024
784
M
Q
H
5-19
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
6. SPECIAL APPENDIX COMMAND LIST BY MODEL
○ : Valid Commands
• : Valid Commands (Independent Functions on Thermal/Slip)
‡ : Command where only settings are valid
× : Invalid command (Ignored)
• Standard Commands
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
HSP7000
Thermal
Executed
Set
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Slip
‡
○
‡
○
○
○
•
Font Style
and
Character
Set
ESC RS F
○
○
○
○
○
○
•
ESC GS t
ESC GS =
ESC R
ESC /
ESC SP
ESC M
ESC P
ESC :
•
•
•
•
ESC g
ESC i
ESC W
ESC h
SO
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
‡
○
○
‡
○
○
○
•
‡
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
•
Character
Expansion
Settings
DC4
ESC SO
ESC DC4
ESC E
ESC F
ESC -
Print Mode
ESC _
ESC 4
ESC 5
ESC GS 4
SI
DC2
ESC RS i
LF
Line
○
○
○
Spacing
CR
ESC a
ESC z
ESC 0
ESC 1
ESC J
ESC j
○
○
○
•
•
•
×
•
•
•
•
○
•
○
○
○
ESC I
ESC A
ESC 2
ESC 3
ESC y
FF
ESC C
ESC C 0
VT
ESC B
ESC l
ESC Q
HT
ESC D
ESC GS A
ESC GS R
ESC GS a
ESC &
ESC %
○
○
○
○
•
•
○
×
×
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
‡
‡
×
‡
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Page
Control
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Horizontal
Direction
Position
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Download
6-1
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
HSP7000
Thermal
Executed
Set
○
○
○
○
Slip
○
○
×
×
○
○
○
○
○
×
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
‡
Bit Image
Graphics
ESC K
ESC L
ESC k
ESC X
○
○
○
○
×
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
‡
‡
‡
○
○
○
‡
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ESC ^
○
○
Logo
ESC FS q
ESC FS p
ESC RS L
ESC b
ESC d
ESC BEL
BEL
○
○
Bar Codes
Cutter Control
○
○
○
External
Device
Drive
○
○
○
○
○
FS
SUB
EM
ESC GS BEL
ESC GS EM DC1
ESC GS EM DC2
ESC RS d
ESC RS r
ESC RS a
ESC ACK SOH
ENQ
EOT
ETB
ESC RS E
ESC p
ESC q
ESC $
ESC s
ESC t
ESC r
ESC u n
ESC x n
ESC w n
RS
CAN
ESC @
ESC U
○
○
Print
Setting
Status
○
○
○
‡
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Kanji
Character
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Others
○
○
○
○
○
○
ESC GS # m
ESC # @
ESC # N ?
ESC # *
ESC ?
○
○
○
○
○
DC3
DC1
6-2
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
• Raster related commands
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
HSP7000
Thermal
Executed
Set
Slip
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Raster
ESC * r R
ESC * r A
ESC * r B
ESC * r C
ESC * r D
ESC * r E
ESC * r F
ESC * r P
ESC * r Q
ESC * r m l
ESC * r m r
ESC * r T
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ESC * r K
b n1 n2 d1...dk
k n1 n2 d1...dk
ESC * r Y
ESC FF NUL
ESC FF EOT
ESC * r N
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ESC * r V
• Black mark related commands
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
HSP7000
Executed
Set
Thermal
Slip
Black Mark
Related
Commands
ESC d
FF
ESC C
ESC C 0
VT
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
○
○
○
ESC B
○
• 2-Color Printing Related Commands
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
HSP7000
Executed
Set
○
Thermal
Slip
2-Color
ESC RS c
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
‡
‡
○
○
‡
‡
○
○
Printing
Related
ESC RS C
ESC 4
○
○
Commands
ESC 5
○
ESC RS d
ESC RS r
ESC FS q
ESC FS p
○
○
○
○
• Mark Commands
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
HSP7000
Executed
Set
Thermal
Slip
Mark
Commands
ESC GS * 0
ESC GS * 1
ESC GS * 2
ESC GS * W
ESC GS * C
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
‡
‡
○
○
○
○
○
○
6-3
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
• Auto Logo Commands
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
HSP7000
Executed
Set
Thermal
Slip
Auto Logo
ESC GS / W
ESC GS / C
ESC GS / 1
ESC GS / 2
ESC GS / 3
ESC GS / 4
ESC GS / 5
ESC GS / 6
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
○
○
○
○
○
○
• PDF417 Commands
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
HSP7000
Executed
Set
○
○
○
○
Thermal
Slip
‡
PDF417
ESC GS x S 0
ESC GS x S 1
ESC GS x S 2
ESC GS x S 3
ESC GS x D
ESC GS x P
ESC GS x I
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
‡
‡
‡
‡
×
○
○
○
○
• Print Start Trigger Control Commands
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
HSP7000
Executed
Set
Thermal
Slip
Print Start-
ing Trigger
Control
ESC GS g 0
ESC GS g 1
○
○
○
×
○
‡
6-4
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
• QR Code Commands
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
HSP7000
Executed
Set
○
○
○
○
Thermal
Slip
QR Codes
ESC GS y S 0
ESC GS y S 1
ESC GS y S 2
ESC GS y D 1
ESC GS y D 2
ESC GS y P
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
‡
‡
‡
‡
‡
×
○
○
○
○
ESC GS y I
• Page Function Commands
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
Model Name
HSP7000
Executed
Set
○
○
Thermal
Slip
Page
Function
ESC GS h 0
ESC GS h 1
○
○
‡
‡
• Slip/Validation Function Commands
Class
Commands
Class
HSP7000
Executed
Set
Thermal
Slip
Slip/
Validation
Function
ESC SI
○
×
×
×
×
×
○
×
○
ESC FF
ESC VT
ESC EM
○
○
○
• Page Mode Commands
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
HSP7000
Executed
Set
Thermal
Slip
Page Mode FF
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
○
○
○
○
ESC n
ESC !
ESC *
ESC T
○
○
○
• Station Selection Command
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
Model Name
HSP7000
Executed
Set
Thermal
Slip
Station
Selection
ESC + A
○
○
○
• Presenter Commands
Class
Commands
Class
HSP7000
Executed
Set
Thermal
Slip
Presenter
ESC SYN 0
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
ESC SYN 1
ESC SYN 3
ESC SYN 4
○
○
○
• MICR Commands
Class
Commands
Class
Model Name
HSP7000
Executed
Set
Thermal
Slip
MICR
ESC FS M
○
×
○
6-5
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
7. SPECIAL APPENDIX COMMAND FUNCTION LIST
7-1) HSP7000
7-1-1) Setting Command List
Execution
Station
Thermal
Slip
Validation
Other Precautions
Thermal, Slip,
Validation
Type
Command
ESC RS F
Line
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Invalid
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Invalid
Shared
Only valid for
thermal
Valid
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Font Style
and
ESC GS t
ESC GS =
Shared
Valid
Valid
Ignored for DBCS
setting & for models
with Kanji characters
Valid
Shared
Ignored for DBCS
setting & for models
with Kanji characters
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid
Shared
Ignored for DBCS
setting & for models
with Kanji characters
Valid after switch to
thermal
Character
Set
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Only valid for
thermal
Invalid
Invalid
ESC R
ESC /
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Shared
ESC SP
Shared with Slip/Vali-
dation a Line Mode
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
For each
Line/Page
For each
Line/Page
Line Mode: Shared
with Thermal/Valida-
tion a Line Mode
Page Mode: Sared
with Validation a
Page Mode
Line Mode: Shared
with Thermal/Valida-
tion a Line Mode
Page Mode: Sared
with Validation a
Page Mode
ESC M
ESC P
Shared
Shared
Valid
Valid
Specify 12 dot pitch
Specify 15 dot pitch
Valid
only Line
Line Mode:
7x9 Selection
Page Mode:
5x9 Fixed
Valid after switch
to line mode
Valid
only Line
Line Mode:
7x9 Selection
Page Mode:
5x9 Fixed
Valid after switch
to line mode
Valid
only Line
Line mode: 5x9 (2P-
1) selection
Valid
only Line
Line mode: 5x9 (2P-
1) selection
Page Mode:
Page mode: 5x9
Fixed
Valid after switch
to line mode
5x9 Fixed
Valid after switch to
line mode
ESC :
Shared
Valid
Valid
Specify 16 dot pitch
Valid
only Line
Line mode: 5x9 (3P-
1) selection
Page mode: 5x9
Fixed
Valid after switch
to line mode
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid
only Line
Line mode: 5x9 (3P-
1) selection
Page mode: 5x9
Fixed
Valid after switch
to line mode
Valid after switch to
thermal
ESC g
Shared
Only valid for
thermal
Invalid
Invalid
ESC 6
ESC 7
ESC i
Shared
Invalid
Invalid
Valid
Two bytes ignored
Two bytes ignored
Invalid
Invalid
Two bytes ignored
Two bytes ignored
Invalid
Invalid
Two bytes ignored
Two bytes ignored
Shared
Shared
Character
Expansion
Expanded by param-
eter n1, n2
After switch slip/
validation, fixed at 2x
even with expansion
enabled
Expanded by param-
eter n
After switch slip/
validation, fixed at 2x
even with expansion
enabled
Expanded by param-
eter n
After switch slip/
validation, fixed at 2x
even with expansion
enabled
Valid
Shared
Fixed at 2x when
parameters n1, n2
are higher than 1.
Expansion valid
by parameter after
switch to thermal
Fixed at 2x when
parameter is higher
than 1.
Expansion valid
by parameter after
switch to thermal
Fixed at 2x when
parameter is higher
than 1.
Valid
Shared
Fixed at 2x when
parameters n1, n2
are higher than 1.
Expansion valid
by parameter after
switch to thermal
Fixed at 2x when
parameter is higher
than 1.
Expansion valid
by parameter after
switch to thermal
Fixed at 2x when
parameter is higher
than 1.
ESC W
ESC h
Shared
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Expansion valid
by parameter after
switch to thermal
Expansion valid
by parameter after
switch to thermal
SO
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
DC4
ESC SO
ESC DC4
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Shared
7-1
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Execution
Thermal
Slip
Validation
Other Precautions
Station
Thermal, Slip,
Type
Command
ESC E
Line
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Valid
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Valid
Validation
Shared
Adornment
Valid
Shared
Shared
ESC G
ESC F
Shared
Shared
Invalid
Valid
Two bytes ignored
Two bytes ignored
Invalid
Two bytes ignored
Two bytes ignored
Invalid
Two bytes ignored
Two bytes ignored
Valid
Shared
Invalid
Valid
Shared
Invalid
ESC H
ESC -
Shared
Shared
Invalid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Shared
ESC _
ESC 4
Shared
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Shared
Valid
Shared
Sets white/black
inverted printing
After switch to slip/
validation, red-black
swithing function
printing valid
Sets red/black sub-
stitute function
Valid
After switch to
thermal, white-black
inversion printing
Sets red/black sub-
stitute function
Valid
After switch to
thermal, white-black
inversion printing
valid
valid
ESC 5
Shared
Valid
Cancel white/black
inverted printing
After switch to slip/
validation, red-black
swithing function
printing canceled
Valid after switch to
slip/valdation
Valid
Shared
Cancel white/black
Valid
Shared
Cancel white/black
inverted printing
After switch to slip,
red-black swithing
function printing
canceled
inverted printing
After switch to
validation, red-black
swithing function
printing canceled
ESC GS 4
SI
Shared
Slip, Validation
Invalid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
valid
Shared
Valid
only Line
Page mode: Valid
after switch to line
Valid
only Line
Page mode: Valid
after switch to line
mode
Page Mode:
mode
Page Mode:
DC2
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
only Line
Valid after switch
only Line
Valid after switch
to line mode
to line mode
ESC RS i
ESC z
Shared
Slip, Validation
valid
Independent
Invalid
Valid
Valid after switch to
slip/valdation
Valid
only Line
Page mode: Valid
Valid
only Line
Page mode: Valid
after switch to line
mode
Line/Page mode
after switch to line
mode
Line/Page mode
Line spac-
ing
Valid
Valid
Station selec-
tion command
For each
Line/Page
settings
Independent
For each
Line/Page
settings
Independent
dependent
ESC 0
ESC 1
ESC A
ESC 2
ESC 3
ESC y
Independent
Valid
Valid
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
Valid
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
Valid
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
Invalid
Invalid
Three bytes ignored
Three bytes ignored
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode
settings
Independent
dependent
Page
Control
ESC C
ESC C 0
ESC c
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Valid after switch to
thermal
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Valid after switch to
thermal
Only valid for
thermal
Shared
Only valid for
thermal
Shared
Only valid for
thermal
Shared
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
ESC B
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Only valid for
thermal
ESC N
ESC O
ESC I
Shared
Invalid
Invalid
Valid
Three bytes ignored
Two bytes ignored
Invalid
Invalid
Three bytes ignored
Two bytes ignored
Invalid
Invalid
Three bytes ignored
Two bytes ignored
Shared
Horizontal
Direction
Position
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
Valid
only Line
Page mode: Valid
after switch to line
mode
Valid
only Line
Page mode: Valid
after switch to line
mode
dependent
ESC Q
Independent
Valid
Valid
only Line
Page mode: Valid
after switch to line
mode
Valid
only Line
Page mode: Valid
after switch to line
mode
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
ESC D
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
ESC GS a
Shared
Page mode: Valid
after switch to line
mode
Page mode: Valid
after switch to line
mode
only Line
only Line
7-2
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Execution
Station
Thermal, Slip,
Validation
Thermal
Other Precau-
Slip
Validation
Other Precautions
Shared with slip
Type
Command
ESC &
Line
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Line/Page
Other Precautions
Shared with validation
Line/Page
tions
Download
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
ESC %
Logos
ESC FS q
ESC BEL
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
External
Drive
Shared
Shared
Device
ESC GS EM
DC1
ESC RS d
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Invalid
Valid
Shared
Invalid
Print Set-
ting
Shared
Only valid
for thermal
Shared
Only valid
for thermal
Shared
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
ESC RS r
Valid
Invalid
Valid after switch to
thermal
Invalid
Valid after switch to
thermal
Status
ESC RS a
ESC p
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Kanji
Character
Shared
Shared
Shared
Page Mode: Valid only
in double-density page
mode
For standard mode,
valid after switching to
double-densitymode/line
mode
Page Mode: Valid only
in double-density page
mode
For standard mode,
valid after switching to
double-densitymode/line
mode
Page Mode: Valid only
in double-density page
mode
Shared
Shared
For standard mode,
valid after switching to
double-densitymode/line
mode
Page Mode: Valid only
in double-density page
mode
For standard mode,
valid after switching to
double-densitymode/line
mode
Page Mode: Valid only
in double-density page
mode
ESC q
ESC $
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Page Mode: Valid only
in double-density page
mode
Valid
Shared
For standard mode,
valid after switching to
double-densitymode/line
mode
For standard mode,
valid after switching to
double-densitymode/line
mode
ESC s
ESC t
ESC r
ESC u
Shared
Shared
Valid
Valid
Shared with Slip/
Validation a Line
Mode setting
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode set-
tings
Independent
Line Mode: Shared with
Validation setting
Line/Page mode set-
tings
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode set-
tings
Independent
Line Mode: Shared with
Validation setting
Line/Page mode set-
tings
Shared with Slip/
Validation a Line
Mode setting
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Independent
Independent
Line Mode: Shared with
Validation setting
Shared with validation
Line Mode: Shared with
Validation setting
Shared with slip
Independent
Station
selection
command
dependent
Shared
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Invalid
Valid after switch
to slip/valdation
Valid
Shared
Page Mode: Valid only
in double-density page
mode
Valid
Shared
Page Mode: Valid only
in double-density page
mode
Slip, Valida-
tion valid
For standard mode,
valid after switching to
double-densitymode/line
mode
For standard mode,
valid after switching to
double-densitymode/line
mode
ESC x
ESC w
ESC U
Shared
Slip, Valida-
tion valid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Valid after switch
to slip/valdation
Valid
Shared
Page Mode: Valid only
in double-density page
mode
For standard mode,
valid after switching to
double-densitymode/line
mode
Page Mode: Valid only
in double-density page
mode
For standard mode,
valid after switching to
double-densitymode/line
mode
Valid
Shared
Page Mode: Valid only
in double-density page
mode
For standard mode,
valid after switching to
double-densitymode/line
mode
Page Mode: Valid only
in double-density page
mode
For standard mode,
valid after switching to
double-densitymode/line
mode
Shared
Slip, Valida-
tion valid
Valid after switch
to slip/valdation
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Shared
Slip, Valida-
tion valid
Valid after switch
to slip/valdation
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode set-
tings
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Line/Page mode set-
tings
Independent
Shared with validation
Shared with slip
Others
ESC e
ESC f
Shared
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Shared
7-3
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Thermal
Slip
Validation
Other Precautions
Execution Station
Thermal, Slip, Validation
Shared
Type
Macro
Command
ESC GS +
Line
Valid
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Valid
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Valid
Shared
Shared
Raster
Mode
ESC * r E
ESC * r F
ESC * r P
ESC * r Q
ESC * r m l
ESC * r m r
ESC * r T
ESC * r K
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Invalid
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Invalid
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
dependent
Only valid for thermal
USB
ESC # # W
ESC RS c
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Invalid
Valid
Shared
Invalid
Related
2-Color
Printing
Shared
Only valid for thermal
Shared
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
ESC RS C
ESC GS * 1
ESC GS * 2
ESC GS / 1
ESC GS / 2
ESC GS / 3
ESC GS / 4
ESC GS / 5
ESC GS / 6
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Only valid for thermal
Mark Com-
mands
Shared
Only valid for thermal
Shared
Only valid for thermal
Auto Logo
Shared
Only valid for thermal
Shared
Only valid for thermal
Shared
Only valid for thermal
Shared
Only valid for thermal
Shared
Only valid for thermal
Shared
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Only valid for thermal
User ID
ESC GS
% 0
ESC GS x
S 0
ESC GS x
S 1
ESC GS x
S 2
ESC GS x
S 3
ESC GS
x D
Shared
Valid
Shared
Invalid
Valid
Shared
Invalid
PDF 417
Shared
Only valid for thermal
Shared
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Only valid for thermal
Shared
Only valid for thermal
Shared
Only valid for thermal
Shared
Only valid for thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
7-4
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Execution
Station
Thermal, Slip,
Validation
Thermal
Slip
Validation
Other Precautions
Type
Command
ESC RS A
Line
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Printer
Driver
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Shared
Only valid for
thermal
Shared
Only valid for
thermal
Shared
Only valid for
thermal
Shared
Only valid for
thermal
Shared
Only valid for
thermal
Shared
Only valid for
thermal
Shared
Only valid for
thermal
Shared
Valid
Valid
only Line
Page Mode: Valid
after switch to line
mode
Valid
only Line
Page Mode: Valid
after switch to line
mode
ESC RS m
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Valid after switch to
thermal
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Valid after switch to
thermal
Print
Start
Trigger
QR
ESC GS g 1
ESC GS y S 0
ESC GS y S 1
ESC GS y S 2
ESC GS y D 1
ESC GS y D 2
ESC GS h 0
ESC GS h 1
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Codes
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Page
Function
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Only valid for
thermal
Shared
Only valid for
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Valid after switch to
thermal
Slip
Function
ESC SI
Shared
Invalid
Invalid
Three bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Invalid
Invalid
Three bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Invalid
Invalid
Three bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
ESC VT
Shared
Slip, Validation
valid
ESC EM
ESC US
ESC n
Shared
Slip/Validation
Valid
Shared
Slip, Validation
valid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Valid after switch to
slip/validation
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid after switch to
slip/valdation
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Page
Mode
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Shared
Two bytes ignored
Valid
only Line
Page Mode:
Two bytes ignored
Valid
only Line
Page Mode:
Two bytes ignored
ESC !
ESC *
ESC T
Invalid
Valid
Two bytes ignored
Valid
Page only
Line Mode:
Two bytes ignored
Valid
Page only
Line Mode:
Two bytes ignored
Raster mode related
Ten bytes ignored
Valid
Page only
Line Mode:
Valid after switch
to page mode
Valid
Page only
Line Mode:
Valid after switch
to page mode
Invalid
Three bytes ignored
Valid
Page only
Line Mode:
Valid after switch
to page mode
Valid
Page only
Line Mode:
Valid after switch to
page mode
Presenter
ESC SYN 1
ESC SYN 2
Invalid
Invalid
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Invalid
Invalid
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Invalid
Invalid
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Shared
7-5
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
7-1-2) Execution Command List
Thermal
Other Precautions
Slip
Validation
Other Precautions
Execution Station
Thermal, Slip, Validation
Independent
Type
Line
Command
LF
Line
Line/Page
Valid
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Valid
Valid
spacing
Station selection
command
For each
Line/Page
For each
Line/Page
dependent
CR
Independent
Valid
Invalid
Valid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Station selection
command
dependent
GS
Independent
One byte ignored
Invalid
One byte ignored
Invalid
One byte ignored
Station selection
command
dependent
ESC a
ESC J
ESC j
ESC I
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Station selection
command
dependent
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Station selection
command
dependent
Independent
Three bytes
ignored
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Station selection
command
dependent
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Station selection
command
dependent
Page
Control
FF
Independent
Invalid
One byte ignored
One byte ignored
Invalid
One byte ignored
One byte ignored
(Line Mode)
Station selection
command
dependent
VT
Independent
Invalid
Invalid
Station selection
command
dependent
Horizontal
Direction
Position
HT
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Station selection
command
dependent
ESC GS A
ESC GS R
ESC HT
ESC K
ESC L
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Station selection
command
dependent
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Station selection
command
dependent
Independent
Four bytes ignored
Invalid
Four bytes ignored
Invalid
Four bytes ignored
Station selection
command
dependent
Bit Image
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Station selection
command
dependent
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Station selection
command
dependent
ESC k
Independent
Invalid
Invalid
All data for the
amount of the coun-
ter received and
Invalid
All data for the
amount of the coun-
ter received and
Station selection
command
dependent
discarded
discarded
ESC X
ESC ^
Independent
All data for the
Invalid
All data for the
Station selection
command
amount of the coun-
ter received and
discarded
amount of the coun-
ter received and
discarded
dependent
Independent
All data for the
amount of the
counter received
and discarded
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Station selection
command
dependent
Logo
ESC FS p
ESC RS L
ESC b
Independent
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Station selection
command
dependent
Independent
Valid
only Line
Page Mode:
Four bytes ignored
Valid
only Line
Page Mode:
Four bytes ignored
Station selection
command
dependent
Bar
Independent
Valid
Line Mode:
Valid
Line Mode:
Codes
Station selection
command
dependent
only Line
Data received
only Line
Data received
and discarded up to
<RS> for unsup-
ported bar codes
Page Mode: Data
received and dis-
and discarded up
to <RS> for unsup-
ported bar codes
Page Mode: Data
received and dis-
carded up to <RS>.
carded up to <RS>.
Cutter
Control
ESC d
Independent
Station selection
command
Valid
Invalid
Three bytes ignored
Invalid
Three bytes ignored
dependent
7-6
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Execution
Station
Thermal
Slip
Validation
Thermal, Slip,
Validation
Type
Command
BEL
Line
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Other Precautions
External
Device
Drive
Shared
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
FS
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
SUB
EM
ESC GS BEL
ESC GS EM
DC2
ESC ACK
SOH
Status
ENQ
EOT
ETB
ESC RS E
RS
Others
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
CAN
ESC @
ESC GS #
Shared
Shared
ESC # N
ESC # @
Shared
Shared
Invalid
Valid
Ignored up to <NUL>
Invalid
Ignored up to <NUL>
Invalid
Ignored up to <NUL>
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
ESC # N ?
ESC # *
ESC ?
DC3
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
DC1
Shared
Invalid
Shared
Invalid
ESC GS r
ESC ETB
Valid
Six bytes ignored
Six bytes ignored
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Invalid
Three bytes ignored
Valid
only Line
Page Mode:
Three bytes
ignored
Valid
only Line
Page Mode:
Three bytes
ignored
Macro
ESC m
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Valid
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Valid
For each
Line/Page
Initialization
Macro
ESC * r R
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Invalid
Valid
Shared
Invalid
Raster
Mode
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Only valid for
thermal
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Only valid for
thermal
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Only valid for
thermal
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
ESC * r A
ESC * r B
ESC * r C
Valid
Valid
Valid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Only valid for
thermal
7-7
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Thermal
Slip
Validation
Execution Station
Thermal, Slip, Valida-
tion
Independent
Station selection
command
Type
Command
ESC * r D
Line
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Invalid
Other Precautions
Line/Page
Invalid
Other Precautions
Raster
Mode
Valid
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
dependent
Only valid for
thermal
b
Independent
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Data for the amount
of the counter
received and
discarded
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Data for the amount
of the counter
received and
discarded
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for
thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for
thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for
thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for
thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for
thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for
thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Only valid for
thermal
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Shared
k
Data for the amount
of the counter
received and
discarded
Data for the amount
of the counter
received and
discarded
ESC * r Y
ESC FF NUL
ESC FF EOT
ESC * r N
ESC * r V
ESC GS * 0
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Three bytes ignored
Three bytes ignored
Three bytes ignored
Three bytes ignored
Data for the amount
of the counter
received and
discarded
Data for the amount
of the counter
received and
discarded
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Data received and
discarded up to
<NUL>.
Mark Com-
mands
Invalid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Invalid
All data for the
counter received
and discarded
Invalid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Invalid
All data for the
counter received
and discarded
ESC GS * W
ESC GS * C
ESC GS / W
ESC GS / C
ESC GS % W
ESC GS % 1
ESC GS % P
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Shared
Auto Logo
User ID
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Shared
Five bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Sends “Error”
Five bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Sends “Error”
PDF 417
ESC GS x P
Valid
Invalid
Invalid
ESC GS x I
ESC GS M
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Maintenance
Counter
Independent
Station selection
command
Page Mode:
Six bytes ignored
Page Mode:
Six bytes ignored
only Line
only Line
dependent
Program
Overwrite
Printer
Driver
Print Start
Trigger
ESC GS ?
Shared
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Invalid
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Invalid
ESC GS CAN
ESC GS g 0
Shared
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Independent
Station selection
command
dependent
Shared
Six bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Sends “Error”
Six bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Sends “Error”
QR Codes
ESC GS y P
ESC GS y I
Valid
Valid
Invalid
Invalid
Valid
Valid
Shared
Shared
7-8
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rev. 0.00
Execution
Station
Thermal, Slip,
Validation
Thermal
Slip
Validation
Other Precautions
Type
Command
ESC RS #
Line
Other Precautions
Four bytes ignored
Line/Page
Invalid
Other Precautions
Four bytes ignored
Line/Page
Invalid
Head
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Invalid
Four bytes ignored
Failure
Detection
Slip
Function
ESC FF
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Invalid
Ignored
Valid
Three bytes ignored
One byte ignored
Valid
Shared
Valid
Shared
Page
Mode
FF
Valid
Page only
Line Mode:
One byte ignored
Valid
Page only
Line Mode:
One byte ignored
(Page Mode)
Staion
Switch
ESC + A
Valid
only Line
Page Mode:
Six bytes ignored
Valid
only Line
Page Mode:
Six bytes ignored
Presenter
MICR
ESC SYN 0
ESC SYN 3
Shared
Shared
Invalid
Invalid
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Invalid
Invalid
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
Invalid
Invalid
Four bytes ignored
Four bytes ignored
ESC SYN 4
ESC FS M
Shared
Invalid
Invalid
Four bytes ignored
Five bytes ignored
Invalid
Valid
Four bytes ignored
Invalid
Invalid
Four bytes ignored
Five bytes ignored
Independent
Station selec-
tion command
dependent
Page Mode:
Five bytes ignored
7-9
STAR LIne Mode Command Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OVERSEAS SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES
STAR MICRONICS AMERICA, INC.
1150 King Georges Post Road, Edison, NJ 08837-3729 U.S.A.
Tel: (int+1)-732-623-5555, Fax: (int+1)-732-623-5590
ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS DIVISION
STAR MICRONICS EUROPE LTD.
Star House, Peregrine Business Park, Gomm Road,
High Wycombe, Bucks, HP13 7DL, U.K.
STAR MICRONICS CO., LTD.
536 Nanatsushinya, Shimizu-ku, Shizuoka,
424-0066 Japan
Tel: (int+44)-1494-471111, Fax: (int+44)-1494-473333
Tel: (int+81)-54-347-0112, Fax: (int+81)-54-347-0709
STAR MICRONICS ASIA LTD.
Please access the following URL
http://www.star-m.jp/eng/dl/dl02.htm
for the latest revision of the manual.
Rm. 1901-5, 19/F., Enterprise Square Two,
3 Sheung Yuet Road, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong
Tel: (int+852)-2796-2727, Fax: (int+852)-2799-9344
Rev. 0.00 2008.09.29
Printed in Japan, 80877105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|